FRANÇAIS
STREUR DE DVD
ISQUE DUR
CORDER
ARD DISC
ENGLISH
HR480F
HR450F
HR400F
D’EMPLOI
ATION MANUAL
PAL
2
•
The region number
for this Recorder is 2.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
OPERATION MANUAL ENGLISH
SAFETY INFORMATION
Note:
This Recorder can be used only where the power
supply is AC 220V-240V, 50Hz. It cannot be used
elsewhere.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER
THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT
IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
AS THE LASER BEAM USED IN THIS RECORDER
IS HARMFUL TO THE EYES, DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
DISASSEMBLE THE CABINET. REFER SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
■DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, AND ANNOYING INTERFERENCE, USE
THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES ONLY.
Laser Diode Properties
Material: DVD: AlGaInP
CD: AlGaAs
Wave length: DVD: 658nm
CD: 785nm
Laser output: Max. DVD: 160mW (Pulse)
CD: 8.5mW (Continuous)
■DV-HR400F
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
ENGLISH
CAUTION:
Power Cord Protection
To avoid any malfunctions of the Recorder, and to
protect against electric shock, fire or personal injury,
please observe the following.
• Hold the plug firmly when connecting or
disconnecting the AC power cord.
• Keep the AC power cord away from heating
appliances.
• Never put any heavy object on the AC power cord.
• Do not attempt to repair or reconstruct the AC power
cord in any way.
• This Recorder is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER
product.
• The CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT label is located on
the rear cover.
• This product contains a low power laser device. To
ensure continued safety do not remove any cover or
attempt to gain access to the inside of the product.
Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.
Contents
SAFETY INFORMATION ..............................
1
Features .......................................................
4
Accessories .................................................
6
Precautions about Using This Product .....
7
Channel Setting .............................................................
Deleting Channels ..........................................................
Re-naming Channels .....................................................
About Hard Disc (HDD) ...............................
9
Display Information ..................................... 32
Recording Format ..........................................................
Unrecordable Material ....................................................
Hard Disc Operation (Recording/Playback/Time Shift
Recording) ...................................................................
Initialisation ....................................................................
CPRM (Copy Control) Information .................................
9
9
Channel Information .......................................................
Checking Remaining Time of HDD and Number of
Titles ............................................................................
Checking Remaining Time of DVD and Number of
Titles ............................................................................
Switching Front Panel Display ........................................
Turning off the LCD Backlight ........................................
9
9
9
About DVD ................................................... 10
Clock Setting ............................................... 29
Clock Setting ..................................................................
29
Channel Setting ........................................... 30
30
31
31
32
32
33
34
34
10
11
12
13
13
13
14
14
Preparation to Operate This Recorder ...... 35
Initialisation and Finalisation ..................... 15
40
Types of Discs that Can Be Used with This Recorder ....
Discs that Cannot Be Used with This Recorder .............
Types of Discs for Recording .........................................
Recording Formats ........................................................
Recording Time ..............................................................
Disc Remaining Time .....................................................
Using the Proper Disc ....................................................
Unrecordable Material ....................................................
Initialisation (Formatting) ................................................
Allowing Discs to Be Played Back
with Other DVD Players (Finalisation) .........................
15
15
About the Contents of the Disc ................. 15
Title, Chapter and Track .................................................
Icons Used on DVD Video Disc Case ............................
The Icons Used in This Operation Manual .....................
15
16
16
Time Shift Viewing/Chasing Playback ....... 36
Time Shift Viewing ..........................................................
Chasing Playback ..........................................................
37
37
Recording to HDD ....................................... 38
Direct Recording to HDD ...............................................
Setting the Record End Time during Direct Recording
(Simple Recording Timer) ............................................
39
Recording to DVD ........................................ 41
Loading Disc ..................................................................
Direct Recording to DVD ................................................
41
41
Setting Recording Mode (HDD/DVD) ......... 43
Important Information ................................. 17
HDD Recording Mode and Recording Time ...................
DVD-RW/R Recording Mode and Recording Time ........
Setting the Manual Recording Mode (MN) .....................
Direct Recording the TV programme you are watching .
Disc Precautions ............................................................
Cautions Regarding Recording ......................................
Copyright ........................................................................
Timer Recording/The GUIDE Plus+®
System ................................................... 45
17
17
17
Major Components ...................................... 18
Main Unit (Front) ............................................................
Front Panel Display ........................................................
Main Unit (Rear) .............................................................
Remote Control Unit ......................................................
Loading the Batteries .....................................................
Operating a TV Using the Remote Control (Universal
Remote Control) ..........................................................
Setting the Remote Control Code ..................................
18
18
18
19
20
21
22
Basic Connection ........................................ 23
Connection Using Aerial Cables and SCART Cables ......
Using Other Types of Video Output ................................
23
24
Auto Installation (INSTALLATION AUTO) ..... 25
Turning the Power On ....................................................
Using the INSTALLATION AUTO for Initial Setting .........
25
25
About START MENU .................................... 27
GUIDE Plus+ System Overview .....................................
GUIDE Plus+ Setup .......................................................
The “One-Button-Record” Feature .................................
Browse, Search, etc... ....................................................
Timer Recording with SHOW VIEW®... ...............................
Manual Recording (Timer Recording by Specifying Date,
Time and Channel) ......................................................
Editing (Confirm, Change and Cancel) a Timer
Programme ..................................................................
Other Functions of the GUIDE Plus+ System ................
43
43
44
44
45
46
49
50
51
53
55
56
Dubbing (HDD/DVD) .................................... 58
Dubbing Method and Dubbing Types .............................
Titles Including “Copy Once” Enabled Programme ........
Rate Conversion Dubbing and High Speed Dubbing .....
Limitation during Dubbing ..............................................
Dubbing (HDD↔DVD)/High Speed Dubbing
(HDD→DVD) ................................................................
58
58
59
60
61
27
27
Eliminating Problems (Recording, Timer
Recording, Dubbing) ............................. 63
Language Setting ........................................ 28
HDD Playback .............................................. 65
About Language Setting ................................................
Changing Language Setting ..........................................
Playback from REC LIST ...............................................
Playback by Selecting Title Number (Direct Playback) ..
Other Types of Playback ................................................
About START MENU ......................................................
Basic START MENU Operation ......................................
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
28
28
65
66
67
Contents
DVD/CD Playback ........................................ 69
Enjoying High Quality Sounds ................... 98
Loading Disc ..................................................................
Playback from REC LIST ...............................................
DVD-RW(Video format)/DVD-R Playback ......................
DVD Video Playback ......................................................
Audio CD/Video CD Playback ........................................
Other Types of Playback ................................................
Playback by Selecting with the Menu in the DVD ...........
Playing 2 Channel Audio with an Analogue Connection ..
Playing Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG Audio with a
Digital Connection ........................................................
Playing 2 Channel Audio with a Digital Connection .........
69
69
70
70
71
71
74
MP3/WMA File Playback ............................. 75
To Play Another File (music title) during Playback .........
To Skip the File during Playback ....................................
75
75
JPEG File Playback ..................................... 76
Playing back still images in sequence ............................
Playing back still images in a selected folder .................
Play back Slide Show .....................................................
76
76
76
Settings During Playback ........................... 77
Function Control .............................................................
77
Simultaneous Recording/Playback
Function ................................................. 79
Chasing Playback ..........................................................
Simultaneous Recording/Playback ................................
79
79
Function Menu ............................................. 80
98
98
99
Recording from External Equipment ......... 100
Recording from a Digital Camcorder Using i.LINK
(DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only) ...................................
Settings for Recording from a Digital Camcorder
(DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only) ...................................
Recording from a Digital Camcorder
(DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only) ...................................
Recording from a Camcorder (VCR) Using an Analogue
Connection ..................................................................
100
101
102
103
Function Setting .......................................... 104
Functions under OTHER SETTINGS .............................
REC FUNCTION ............................................................
Basic Operation for REC FUNCTION Setting ................
VIEW/PLAY SETTING ...................................................
Basic Operation for VIEW/PLAY SETTING ....................
ADJUSTMENT ...............................................................
Basic Operation for ADJUSTMENT Setting ...................
CONTROL SET ..............................................................
Basic Operation for CONTROL SET ..............................
104
104
106
107
110
111
114
115
116
80
Troubleshooting .......................................... 117
Editing (HDD/DVD) ...................................... 81
On-screen Error Messages ........................ 121
About Editing ..................................................................
Editing Procedure ..........................................................
Switching between Original and Play List (Play Lists can
be created only for HDD or VR mode) .........................
81
81
Glossary ....................................................... 124
82
Specifications .............................................. 127
How to Use the FUNCTION MENU ...............................
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD) .......... 83
Erasing Unnecessary Scenes from an Original Title
(ERASE SCENE) .........................................................
Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) ..............
Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER) .............
Combining Chapters Together
(COMBINE CHAPTERS) .............................................
83
85
86
87
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD) .................... 88
Creating a Play List ........................................................
Adding a Scene from an Original to a Play List
(ADD SCENE) .............................................................
Changing the Title Sequence (MOVE TITLE) ................
Erasing Unnecessary Scenes (ERASE SCENE) ...........
Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) ..............
Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER) .............
Combining Chapters Together
(COMBINE CHAPTERS) .............................................
88
89
91
92
92
92
92
Disc Management ........................................ 93
Inputting/Changing Title Name
(CHANGE TITLE NAME) .............................................
Disabling Title Edit and Erase (TITLE PROTECT) .........
Disabling DVD Disc Edit and Erase
(DVD Disc PROTECT) .................................................
Erasing All Titles ............................................................
Erasing by Selecting a Title (or Chapter) .......................
93
94
94
95
95
Initialise/Finalise ......................................... 96
Initialisation ....................................................................
Finalisation .....................................................................
Basic Operation for INITIALISE/FINALISE ....................
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
96
96
97
Features
The DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F/DV-HR400F DVD Recorder with Hard Disc
realises easy programming with the GUIDE Plus+ system, and up to 48x
high-speed dubbing.
1
“DVD Multi-Play” can play 5 types
of recordable DVD discs
• Besides DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+RW *1 and DVD+R
*1 discs, it can also play DVD-RAM *2 discs. Even a
DVD borrowed from a friend can be played no
matter what format it uses.
*1
*2
Only the discs recorded in a video format and finalised
can be played.
DVD-RAM Version 2 discs with a 4.7GB or 9.6GB capacity
which have been recorded using the VR system of another
DVD recorder. (To play a DVD-RAM disc, remove the disc
from its cartridge.)
2
Support for high-speed dubbing*3
at up to 48x speed from the HDD
to DVD makes creating a video
library easy
1High speed dubbing*3
Enables high speed dubbing from hard disc to DVD
so you can enjoy creating your own video library.
2Rate conversion dubbing
The mode can be selected from 32 levels just like
recording mode. This enables recording at the
optimal picture quality, given the remaining empty
space on the disc.
3Exact dubbing
This automatically adjusts to the optimal record
mode so that the material is dubbed exactly into the
remaining area on the disc.
*3
To perform high-speed dubbing, you must use discs
conforming to Ver.1.1/2x, 1.2/2x or 1.2/4x for DVD-RW, or
Ver.2.0/4x or 2.0/8x for DVD-R. When using DVD-RW
Ver.1.1/2x and DVD-R Ver.2.0/4x, the maximum dubbing
speeds will be approximately 12x and 24x, respectively.
3
Progressive scanning playback
• Using Component Video Output, you can enjoy high
quality, high-density video with no jagged contours
and no flicker.
4
The GUIDE Plus+ system
• The GUIDE Plus+® *4 system is an interactive on-
screen television programming guide integrated into
the Recorder. The system is available at no monthly
charge and offers programme listings for all major
channels received in your home, one-touch recording, search by genre, recommendations according
to your profile and more. In this new era of everincreasing number of channels, the GUIDE Plus+
system offers television viewers a convenient way to
find out what's on right now or in the next week, by
channel or by genre. The GUIDE Plus+ system also
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
allows viewers to automatically set their recording
selections quickly and easily. The TV listings
information displayed in the GUIDE Plus+ system is
obtained directly from sources in the broadcasting
industry. This information is received and processed
by Gemstar-TV Guide and “broadcasted” via so
called “Host Channels” directly to the Recorder.
• You can also programme your Recorder for timer
recording simply by inputting the SHOWVIEW® *4
programming number.
*4 GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW, VIDEO Plus+, G-LINK are (1)
registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured
under license from and (3) subject of various international
patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to,
Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related
affiliates.
5
Built-in DV terminal for high
quality dubbing from digital video
camcorder (DV-HR480F/DVHR450F only)
• You can connect to a digital video camcorder with
i.LINK to perform high quality digital video dubbing.
You can also operate camcorder playback functions
such as rewind, fast forward, and stop from the
control panel.
6
High picture quality design (Used
in all hard disc and DVD modes)
1VBR (Variable Bit Rate) recording
Constantly maintains optimal high picture quality by
varying the bit rate (amount of video data) for each
scene depending on the video content (e.g. whether
movement is fast or slow).
2Improved play noise reduction
3-dimensional DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION: This
eliminates the noise contained in the brightness
signals and colour signals, and minimizes the rough
textures of images.
BLOCK NOISE REDUCTION: This cuts the amount
of block noise seen in the fast-moving images in
sports programmes, for example.
MOSQUITO NOISE REDUCTION: This reduces the
flicker noise that occurs in areas such as the
outlines of images.
3Linear PCM recording
Linear PCM recording with high sound quality is
supported *5 to reproduce music programmes and
other such programmes with a clear sound quality.
*5
Supports only the XP mode.
Features
7
Speed viewing and speed listening
(Rapid play)
• Plays a disc at 1.5 times faster than normal speed
with sound. It lets you check lengthy recorded
programmes quickly and easily.
8
32-step manual rate video recording
• The video recording mode can be selected form 32
steps, including four basic steps of high image
quality (XP), standard (SP), x2 (LP) and x3 (EP) .
You may choose one from these steps for optimal
image quality depending on the amount of free
memory remaining on the disc.
9
Comprehensive editing functions
(Only titles recorded on the hard disc or in VR
mode on DVD-RW can be edited.)
1Play list edit
This lets you gather only the needed parts (i.e. a
“Play List”) from a recorded original video (title). You
can rearrange scenes and combine them with other
scenes, or rearrange titles. This is convenient when
you want to dub and save only the necessary
scenes and titles.
2Chapter edit
This lets you divide a title into chapter units during
recording/playback or using the edit screen. After
dividing, a list of recordings (thumbnails) can be
displayed in chapter units, so you can copy, erase
or dub to the play list in chapter units.
3Erase Scene
This lets you erase unnecessary scenes. This is
convenient when you want to cut out the commercials in a recorded programme before dubbing.
4Batch erasing of titles/chapters
Titles and chapters which become unnecessary
after editing can be batch erased by selecting them
from the list of recordings (thumbnails).
5Edit undo function*6
If you mistakenly erase data during editing, this
function lets you restore it to its immediately
preceding state, just like “Undo” on a PC, so you
can edit worry-free.
*6 Edit undo can only be used once. It only works when
“UNDO” is assigned to a coloured button (yellow)
displayed on the screen.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
10 “Time Shift Viewing”, “Chasing
Playback” and “Simultaneous
Recording/Playback” —functions
you can only get with a hard disc
1Time shift viewing
While you are watching a programme, the phone
rings.… At times like this, you can pause the
programme being broadcast at the press of a
button, and then watch the rest of the programme at
your leisure after you finish your phone call.
2Chasing playback
You return home earlier than expected while timer
recording is in progress…. At times like this, you
don’t have to wait for recording to end. You can
immediately view the programme from the beginning.
3Simultaneous recording/playback
Even while recording to the hard disc, you can
enjoy playback of a DVD, or programmes already
recorded on hard disc. You don’t have to wait for
recording to finish.
11 MP3/WMA file playback
• This Recorder allows you to playback MP3/WMA
files recorded on CD-RW/R.
12 JPEG file playback
• This Recorder enables you to display still images
stored as JPEG files on a CD-RW/R. You can
display images one at a time, or use the Slide Show
function to automatically display images sequentially.
Accessories
Two R-03 size batteries
(“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4)
for the remote control unit
Remote control unit
RF coaxial cable
A. Information on Disposal
for Users (private households)
1. In the European Union
Attention: Your product
is marked with this
symbol. It means that
used electrical and
electronic products
should not be mixed
with general household
waste. There is a
separate collection
system for these
products.
Attention: If you want to dispose of this
equipment, please do not use the ordinary
dust bin!
Used electrical and electronic equipment must
be treated separately and in accordance with
legislation that requires proper treatment,
recovery and recycling of used electrical and
electronic equipment.
Following the implementation by member
states, private households within the EU
states may return their used electrical and
electronic equipment to designated collection
facilities free of charge*. In some countries*
your local retailer may also take back your old
product free of charge if you purchase a
similar new one.
*) Please contact your local authority for
further details.
If your used electrical or electronic equipment
has batteries or accumulators, please dispose
of these separately beforehand according to
local requirements.
By disposing of this product correctly you will
help ensure that the waste undergoes the
necessary treatment, recovery and recycling
and thus prevent potential negative effects on
the environment and human health which
could otherwise arise
due to inappropriate waste handling.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Video/audio cable
G-LINK cable
2. In other Countries outside
the EU
If you wish to discard this product, please
contact your local authorities and ask for the
correct method of disposal.
For Switzerland: Used electrical or electronic
equipment can be returned free of charge to
the dealer, even if you don’t purchase a new
product. Further collection facilities are listed
on the homepage of www.swico.ch or
www.sens.ch.
B. Information on Disposal
for Business Users
1. In the European Union
If the product is used for business purposes
and you want to discard it:
Please contact your SHARP dealer who will
inform you about the take-back of the product.
You might be charged for the costs arising
from take-back and recycling.
Small products (and small amounts) might be
taken back by your local collection facilities.
For Spain: Please contact the established
collection system or your local authority for
take-back of your used products.
2. In other Countries outside
the EU
If you wish to discard of this product, please
contact your local authorities and ask for the
correct method of disposal.
Precautions about Using This Product
Do not use at locations at high
temperature.
Do not place objects on the Recorder.
• If you leave this equipment at a location which rises to an
abnormally high temperature (like the inside of a car with
the windows shut), this may cause deformation of the
cabinet or malfunction. Be very careful not to allow the
area around the Recorder or discs to reach a high
temperature.
• Do not place any objects, such as vases or lighted
candles on the top of the Recorder.
• Set up at a location where there is adequate space above
the Recorder.
• Do not place a TV or other heavy object on the Recorder.
Doing so may result in problems like noise appearing on
the screen, or deformation of the cabinet.
• Do not place the Recorder on any equipment which gets
hot.
• Do not place at a location which is exposed to direct
sunlight, or near a heater. Be careful because doing so
will have an adverse effect on the cabinet and components.
Keep away from magnetic objects.
• Keep the Recorder away from strong magnetic objects.
Handle the Recorder carefully.
• Do not drop the Recorder, or subject it to strong impact or
vibration. Doing so will cause malfunction. Be careful
when carrying or moving the Recorder.
No fingers or other objects inside
• Do not put any foreign object on the disc tray.
When moving or shipping the
Recorder
Do not remove the cabinets.
• Do not remove the Recorder cabinets. Touching parts
inside the cabinet could result in electric shock and/or
damage to the Recorder. For service and adjustment
inside the cabinet, please contact the nearest service
centre approved by Sharp.
Do not cover the fan or ventilation holes on the back of the Recorder.
• When setting up the Recorder, do not cover the fan or
ventilation holes on the rear of the Recorder. This will
interfere with the cooling fan and cause malfunction. Be
especially careful of this point when housing the Recorder
in a TV stand or AV rack.
• Do not use the Recorder on carpets, or on a bed or sofa,
or wrap the Recorder in cloth or other material. This will
interfere with the cooling fan and cause malfunction.
Avoid dust and smoke.
• Do not place the Recorder at a location which is unstable,
subject to heavy vibration or where there is a lot of dust or
tobacco smoke. Doing so may cause malfunction or
accidents.
Set up the Recorder so it is horizontal.
• Do not stand the Recorder up vertically or place it upside
down. Doing so will cause malfunction.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
• Remove the disc before wrapping the Recorder. In case
you will not be using the Recorder for a while, remove the
disc, and turn off the power.
Dew formation
• Dew may form on the surface of and inside the Recorder
if you suddenly carry it from a cold location to a warm
location, or use it in a cold room where heating has just
been turned on (i.e. on a winter morning). If dew forms,
let the Recorder sit with the power off until the dew
disappears. Using the Recorder with dew formation
present may cause malfunction. (Page 17)
Precautions about Using This Product
Upkeep of cabinet
• The cabinet surface employs a lot of plastic. Do not wipe
these surfaces with benzene or thinner because this may
cause deterioration or paint peeling.
• In the unlikely event that the hard disc (HDD) malfunctions for some reason, you cannot replace it by yourself. If
you disassemble the Recorder you will void the warranty.
Please contact the nearest service centre approved by
Sharp. We cannot provide compensation for data content
if data is lost or not recorded.
Connected equipment
• Read carefully the “Precautions for Use” in the operation
manual for any equipment connected to the Recorder.
Power conservation
• Do not apply volatile liquids like insecticide to the
cabinet. Also, do not allow long-term contact with
materials like rubber, vinyl products or synthetic leather.
Doing so may cause problems like paint peeling.
• Do not affix stickers or tape to the Recorder. Doing so
may cause cabinet discolouration or damage.
• If the cabinet or front panel display gets dirty, gently wipe
it off with soft cloth like flannel. If it is extremely dirty, soak
a cloth in neutral detergent diluted with water, wring the
cloth well, wipe, and then wipe again with a dry cloth.
Using powerful cleaners may cause discolouration,
deterioration or paint peeling. We recommend testing any
cleaners at an inconspicuous location on the Recorder.
Electromagnetic interference
• If you use a mobile phone or other electronic equipment
near the Recorder, video may be disturbed or become
noisy during playback or recording due to electromagnetic interference.
Aerial
• To avoid the effects of radio interference, set up the aerial
at a location away from busy roads, electric wires for
train, electric transmission lines and neon signs.
This is effective for preventing electric shock accidents in
the unlikely event that aerial falls down.
• Do not make the aerial line unnecessarily long, or bundle
it. Be careful because doing so will cause the picture to
be unstable.
• The aerial is exposed to the weather, so be careful to
periodically check and replace it. This will ensure a
beautiful picture. Aerials are particularly susceptible to
damage at locations with heavy smoke and soot, and
locations exposed to sea breeze.
Hard disc (HDD)
• This Recorder records programmes onto a hard disc
(HDD). The hard disc is equipped with a safety mechanism to protect data from impact, vibration and dust.
However, to prevent loss of recorded data, you should be
particularly careful of the following points:
• Do not subject the Recorder to any impact.
• Do not use at a location which is unstable or subject to
vibration.
• Do not move the Recorder while the power is on.
• Do not unplug the power cord from the AC outlet
during recording or playback. First turn power “OFF”,
and then unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.
• Do not use at a location with abrupt temperature
variation (variation of more than 10°C per hour).
• The Recorder will malfunction if used at a cold location
(5°C or less) or an extremely hot location (35°C or
higher).
• If you carry the Recorder from a cold location to a
warm location, let the Recorder sit for a while before
using it.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
• When you are finished using the Recorder, conserve
power by turning power off. If you go on a trip, or
otherwise will not use the Recorder for a long time,
unplug the power cord from the AC outlet to ensure
safety.
Requests regarding setup
• Do not cover the fan or ventilation holes on the back of
the Recorder. Doing so will interfere with heat radiation
and cause malfunction.
Notes about use
• The Recorder and cabinet may become a little hot,
depending on the use environment when using this
Recorder. This is not a malfunction.
• When unplugging the power cord (to move the Recorder,
etc.), first turn off power (STANDBY indicator on the front
of the Recorder lights up red) to protect the hard disc
(HDD).
• When power is turned on, the fan will rotate to cool the
Recorder.
• Immediately after plugging the power cord into an AC
outlet, or after recovery from a power failure, the unit may
fail to operate for more than ten seconds because the
Recorder is performing system adjustment.
Notes about this operation
manual
• In this operation manual, the terms “the Recorder”, “this
Recorder” or “your Recorder” refer to the “DV-HR480F/
DV-HR450F/DV-HR400F DVD Recorder with Hard Disc”.
• The screen displays and Recorder illustrations given in
this operation manual are for explanatory purposes, and
may differ somewhat from the actual screen and Recorder.
About Hard Disc (HDD)
This Recorder has a built in hard disc (abbreviated as
“HDD”) for recording and playback. Beware of the
following points when setting up and using the Recorder.
Failure to observe precautions may cause damage to the
HDD itself or its content, failure of the disc to operate, or
recording of noise.
• Do not subject to any vibration or impact.
• Do not place at a cramped location which might block the
cooling fan or ventilation port on the back of the Recorder.
• Do not place at a location with severe temperature
variation.
s If the Recorder is set up at a location with severe
temperature variation, dew may form on and inside the
Recorder. If the Recorder is used with internal dew
formation present, this may cause HDD damage or
malfunction. We recommend keeping variation in room
temperature within 10˚C per hour.
• Do not place at a location with high humidity.
• Place the Recorder horizontally, never at an incline.
• When the power is on, do not unplug the power cord from
the AC outlet, turn off the breaker for the area where the
Recorder is set up, or move the Recorder.
s When moving the Recorder, first turn off the power (the
STANDBY indicator is lit red)and then unplug the power
cord from the AC outlet.
Recording Format
■ HDD recording is done using the variable bit rate
format (VBR) for more efficient recording.
The following phenomena may occur.
With the variable bit rate format, the remaining amount
which can be recorded may increase or decrease relative
to the display of the remaining amount of HDD space.
• When the display indicates that the remaining amount of
HDD space is low, first delete unnecessary programmes,
and then record with an extra margin in the amount of
remaining space.
• Even if you delete a programme, the remaining amount
may not increase by the amount of deleted time. When
recording new video, record with an extra margin in the
amount of remaining space.
• With this Recorder, part of the HDD capacity is used as a
system management area.
In the unlikely event that there is some problem like loss
of recorded video or audio content due to an HDD
malfunction, please be aware beforehand that Sharp will
bear no responsibility to compensate for the content
which could not be recorded or edited, for the loss of
recorded or edited video, or for other related direct or
indirect damages.
■ If a power failure occurs
• The content being recorded or timer recorded may be
damaged if power failure occurs.
• The content being played back may be damaged.
■ For important recording
• If the HDD malfunctions, the content recorded on the
HDD may be lost. If you wish to save content permanently, we recommend copying or moving the content
to DVD-RW or DVD-R.
NOTE
• If a message indicating an HDD error is displayed (such
as “ERROR IN HDD. CANNOT OPERATE.”) and the HDD
has malfunctioned, you cannot replace the HDD by
yourself. If you disassemble the Recorder, the warranty
will become void. Also, recovery of data is impossible. If
playback is possible, re-record the recorded content onto
a DVD-RW/R disc, and contact your nearest service
centre approved by Sharp.
Hard Disc Operation
(Recording / Playback / Time Shift
Recording)
• If the Recorder is used in a cold location (a location at
low temperature), the drive will only allow live viewing
after power is turned on until the HDD is ready. During
this time, the Recorder will not allow Time Shift Viewing,
recording, display of recording lists or playback of
recorded programmes. Please wait until the HDD is
ready.
Initialisation
• Initialisation erases all video recorded on the HDD. Be
sure to dub important recordings onto DVD-RW/R discs
before initialising.
Unrecordable Material
• This Recorder is equipped with a copy guard function
that prevents recording of video software or broadcast
programmes that contain a signal that restricts copying in
accordance with copyrights and so forth.
• In the case a copy guard signal is contained in a source
video that occurs partway through recording, recording is
paused at that point. Recording resumes when the copy
guard signal is no longer present, while no recordings will
be made for the part where the copy prevention signal is
present.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
CPRM (Copy Control) Information
• CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
manages protection for content copyrights.
• There are 3 types of copy control signals: “Copy Freely”,
“Copy Once” and “Copy Never”.
“Copy Never” programmes cannot be recorded.
When a “Copy Once” enabled programme is copied from
HDD to DVD-RW, the video is not copied — it is moved
from the HDD to the DVD-RW (i.e. the content recorded
on the HDD is erased).
• “Copy Once” programmes that have been recorded to a
DVD-RW disc cannot be dubbed to the HDD.
About DVD
A Quick Reference for Selecting
Discs
The following is a quick reference to see what discs can/
cannot be used with this recorder. Each disc has a compatible Recording Format(s). Also, there are some constraints.
For detailed and exact information, read the explanations in
pages 10 and 11.
■ Can Play Back and Record
DVD-RW
DVD-R
■ Can Only Play Back (Can Not Record)
DVD Video (with Region number “2” and “ALL” only)
DVD+RW/DVD+R (finalized disc only)
DVD-RAM (remove the cartridge)
Video CD
Audio CD
CD-RW/CD-R
■ Can Neither Record nor Play Back
CDG, Photo CD, CD-ROM, CD-TEXT, SVCD, SACD, PD,
CDV, DVD-ROM, DVD-Audio
Types of Discs that Can Be
Used with This Recorder
Discs For Recording and Playback
DVD-RW
•Ver.1.0
•Ver.1.1
•Ver.1.1
Recording
Format
VR mode
VR mode
Video mode
(CPRM
compatible)*1
•Ver.1.1/2x
(CPRM
4.7
*1
*2
•Ver.2.0
•Ver.2.0/4x*2
•Ver.2.0/8x*2
Disc Size
12 cm (5"),
single-sided/
double-sided,
single layer disc
Audio + Video
(Movie)
compatible)*1
•Ver.1.2/4x
(CPRM
compatible)*1
DVD-R
Contents
Video mode
“Copy Once” broadcasts and other programmes that
can be recorded only once can be recorded.
In the real operation, the Recorder does not always
realise the maximum speed.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Disc Type
DVD Video Region
number
2
DVD+RW/DVD+R
the cartridge
from the disc)
Contents
Disc Size
Video mode
Audio + Video
(Movie)
12 cm (5")
8 cm (3")
VR mode
Audio + Video
8 cm (3")
Video mode
(Movie)
ALL
DVD-RW/DVD-R
DVD-RAM
(Remove
Recording
Format
Video mode
Audio + Video
(finalised disc (Movie)
only)
VR mode
4.7/9.6 GB
Ver. 2.0
Audio + Video
12 cm (5")
12 cm (5")
(Movie)
Video CD
Video CD
Audio + Video
(Movie)
Audio CD *3
Audio CD
(CD-DA)
Audio
CD-RW/CD-R
Audio CD
Audio
(CD-DA)
• Since this Recorder is compatible with the PAL format, use
discs that contain the letters “PAL” on the disc or package.
NTSC and PAL-60 signals cannot be recorded.
(A black screen is shown when NTSC or PAL-60
signals are input to the external input.)
• The following discs can be played back and recorded with
this Recorder. Do not use an 8 cm (3") adapter (for CDs).
• Use discs that are compatible with standards as indicated by the presence of the following logo marks on the
disc label. Playback of discs not complying with these
standards is not guaranteed. In addition, image quality or
sound quality is not guaranteed even if such discs are
able to be played back.
Disc Type
Discs for Playback (Playback Only)
12 cm (5")
8 cm (3")
MP3 file
WMA file
JPEG
Video CD
*3
Still image
(JPEG file)
Audio + Video
(Movie)
This Recorder has been designed on the premise of
playing back Audio CDs that comply with CD (Compact
Disc) standards. CDs containing a signal for the purpose
of protecting copyrights (copy control signal) may not be
able to be played back with this Recorder.
• DVD video players and discs have region numbers,
which dictate the regions in which a disc can be played.
The region number for this product is 2. (Discs marked
ALL will play in any player.)
• DVD Video operations and functions may be different
from the explanations in this manual and some operations
may be prohibited due to disc manufacturer’s setting.
• If a menu screen or operating instructions are displayed
during playback of a disc, follow the operating procedure
displayed.
• The audio component of a DVD video recorded at 96 kHz
(Linear PCM) will be output as 48 kHz audio during
playback.
• This Recorder conforms to the PAL colour system. Also
you can play discs recorded with the NTSC system via a
PAL system TV set. (The Recorder does not output NTSC
signal but only PAL signal.)
NOTE
• Some of the discs in the tables above may not be able to
play back depending on each disc.
About DVD
Discs that Cannot Be Used with
This Recorder
■ The following discs are unable to be played back or
are not played back properly on this Recorder. If such
a disc is mistakenly played back, the speakers may be
damaged due to the large volume. Never attempt to
play back such discs.
CDG, Photo CD, CD-ROM, CD-TEXT, SVCD, SACD, PD,
CDV, CVD, DVD-ROM, DVD-Audio
■ Discs with unusual shapes cannot be played.
• Discs with unusual shapes (heart-shaped or hexagonal
discs, etc.) cannot be used. The use of such discs will
cause a fault.
■ The following DVD video discs cannot be played.
• Discs not containing “2” or “ALL” for the region number
(discs sold outside the authorized marketing area).*4
• Discs produced illegally.
• Discs recorded for commercial use.
*4
The region number for this product is 2.
■ The following DVD-RW/R, DVD+RW/R and DVD-RAM
discs cannot be played.
• Discs on which data has not been recorded cannot be
played back.
• Discs may not be played back depending on the
recorder used for recording.
■ The following Audio CD discs cannot be played.
• Discs containing a signal for the purpose of protecting
copyrights (copy control signal) may not be played
back with this Recorder.
• This Recorder has been designed on the premise of
playing back Audio CDs that comply with CD (Compact Disc) standards.
■ The following CD-RW/R discs cannot be played.
• Discs on which data has not been recorded cannot be
played back.
• Non-finalised discs cannot be played back.
• Discs recorded in a format other than a Video CD/
Audio CD and JPEG/MP3/WMA file format*5 cannot be
played back.
• Discs may not be played back depending on their
recording status or the status of the disc itself.
• Discs may not be played back depending on their
compatibility with this Recorder or the recorder used
for recording.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
*5
About MP3 file format
MP3 files are audio data compressed in MPEG1 Audio
layer 3 file format. “MP3 files” have “.mp3” as extensions.
(Some files that have “.mp3” extensions or files that have
not been recorded in MP3 format will produce noise or
cannot be played.)
Æ Playing MP3 discs
• The MP3 files are not played in the order they were
recorded.
• The maximum number of layers which can be
recognized, including files and folders, is 8.
• Some multi-session discs cannot be played.
• It is recommended to record data at a lower speed as
data recorded at fast speed can produce noise and
may not be able to be played.
• The more folders there are, the longer the reading
time.
• Depending on the folder tree, reading MP3 files can
take time.
• Folder or track (file) names are limited to 8 characters.
Folder or track (file) names that go over 8 characters
will be abbreviated. (Certain letters or symbols in
folder names or title name may not be displayed.)
• The playing time may not be correctly displayed
during MP3 file playback.
Æ The following files cannot be played on this
Recorder.
• Discs that have more than 256 folders or 999 files.
• When both Audio CD format and MP3 files format are
recorded on a disc. (The disc is recognized to be an
Audio CD and only tracks in the Audio CD format are
played back.)
*5
About JPEG file format
JPEG is a type of file format for storing still-image files
(photos, illustrations, etc.). The Recorder lets you play
JPEG format still-image files.(Max. 2MB; in general,
equivalent to a 3 mega pixel resolution.) Even files with a
resolution exceeding 3 mega pixels can be played if
their capacity is less than 2MB.
Æ File formats that are not compatible.
• Still images in formats other than JPEG (such as TIFF)
cannot be played.
• There may be some files that cannot be played even if
they are in the JPEG format.
• Progressive JPEG files cannot be played.
• Moving image files and audio files as well as the
Motion JPEG format files, though they are JPEG files,
cannot be played.
Æ Other files that cannot be played back
• JPEG files larger than 2MB in size cannot be played.
• Files with filenames consisting of more than 8
characters will not be recognized.
• You may not be able to play some still images which
you have created, touched up, copied or otherwise
edited on your computer.
Æ You may experience one or more of the following
symptoms when playing files.
• It may take some time to play files depending on the
number of folders, number of files and volume of data
involved.
• Exif information will not be displayed.
• Still images other than those of 720 x 480 pixels in size
and integral multiple of this size may show black
borders around the edges.
About DVD
Æ When using the unit to play a CD-RW/R disc with still
images stored (recorded).
• With CD-RW/R discs on which still images are mixed
in with music or movies, you will be able to play only
the still images. You may not be able to play some of
these discs at all.
• This unit can recognize a maximum of 256 folders
arranged in up to 8 hierarchical levels. The maximum
number of files recognized is 4,096 files.
• Multi-session discs cannot be played.
• You may not be able to play some still images you
have processed (rotated or saved by overwriting other
images) using image processing software or some still
images you have imported from the Internet or e-mail.
• Characters used in still image filenames other than
half-size alphanumeric may be replaced with asterisks
(*) or spaces on the display or the file may not be
played even if the filename has 8 or less characters.
*5
About WMA file format
WMA is a data compression format of Microsoft Corporation. “WMA files” have “.wma” as extensions. (Some files
that have “.wma” extensions or files that have not been
recorded in WMA format will produce noise or cannot be
played.)
Æ Playing WMA discs
• The WMA files are not played in the order they were
recorded.
• The maximum number of layers which can be
recognized, including files and folders, is 8.
• Some multi-session discs cannot be played.
• It is recommended to record data at a lower speed as
data recorded at fast speed can produce noise and
may not be able to be played.
• The more folders there are, the longer the reading
time.
• Depending on the folder tree, reading WMA files can
take time.
• Folder or track (file) names are limited to 8 characters.
Folder or track (file) names that go over 8 characters
will be abbreviated. (Certain letters or symbols in
folder names or title name may not be displayed.)
• The playing time may not be correctly displayed
during WMA file playback.
Æ The following files cannot be played on this
Recorder.
• Discs that have more than 256 folders or 999 files.
• When both Audio CD format and WMA files format are
recorded on a disc. (The disc is recognized to be an
Audio CD and only tracks in the Audio CD format are
played back.)
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Types of Discs for Recording
• DVD-RW and DVD-R discs can be recorded with this
Recorder. The recording format that can be selected may
vary according to the disc version and type of disc.
• Make sure to use a disc that has the words “For Video”,
“For General” or “For Recording” on the disc or disc
jacket for recording and playback with this Recorder.
Disc Type
DVD-RW Ver.1.1
DVD-RW Ver.1.1
(CPRM)
DVD-RW Ver.1.1/2x
(CPRM)
DVD-RW Ver.1.2/4x
(CPRM)
DVD-R Ver.2.0
DVD-R Ver.2.0/4x
DVD-R Ver.2.0/8x
Recording Format
VR mode
Video mode
×
×
—
×
DVD-RW Discs
• DVD-RW discs are available in Ver.1.1, Ver.1.1 (CPRM
compatible), Ver.1.1/2x (CPRM compatible) or Ver.1.2/
2-4x (CPRM compatible).
• When a disc has been recorded in the VR mode, it
can be recorded and erased repeatedly. Erasure also
allows the recording time to be increased.
• When a disc has been recorded in the Video mode,
additional recording is possible until the disc is full.
The recording time does not increase*6 even if titles
are erased, but if the disc is initialised (pages 15 and
96) full recording time is possible.
*6
Recording time can only be increased when the last
title is erased (titles cannot be erased after a disc
has been finalised).
DVD-R Discs
• DVD-R discs can only be recorded in the Video
mode.
• Although additional recordings can be made until the
disc is full, disc space does not increase even if titles
are erased (because erasure here refers only to
making the titles not visible).
• Although these discs can be played back with other
DVD players once they have been finalised, the discs
can no longer be recorded or erased after they have
been finalised.
• Discs can be additionally recorded and edited with
this Recorder only until they are finalised.
About DVD
Recording Formats
• There are two recording formats available with this
Recorder: the VR mode and the Video mode.
• The recording format that can be selected may differ
depending on the disc. Refer to the section on Types of
Discs for Recording (page 12).
• Recording in the VR mode and Video mode cannot be
mixed on one disc.
VR (Video Recording) Mode
The VR mode is the basic DVD-RW recording format, and
lets you enjoy the various editing functions available
with this Recorder.
• When a disc has been recorded in the VR mode, it can
be recorded and erased repeatedly. Erasure also allows
the recording time to be increased.
• Recorded discs can only be played back with DVD-RW
compatible DVD players*7.
• “Copy Once” programmes can also be recorded*8.
*7
*8
• Although there are some cases in which the disc must
be finalised, the disc can be recorded and erased
after it has been finalised.
• DVD-RW compatible DVD players have the following
indication.
DVD players with this indication have the function of
being able to play back DVD-RW discs recorded in
the VR mode with a DVD recorder.
When using a DVD-RW Ver.1.1/1.2 disc (CPRM compatible). Recorded programmes cannot be played back
with other DVD players (including DVD-RW players) or
DVD recorders not compatible with CPRM.
Video Mode
This recording format is compatible with commercially
available DVD players and DVD-ROM drives.
• Discs recorded in the Video mode cannot be recorded
repeatedly or their content overwritten.
• When recording in the Video mode, discs can be played
back, additionally recorded and edited only with this
Recorder until they are finalised.
• Discs recorded in the Video mode can be played back
with other DVD players by finalising them after recording.
(However, this does not guarantee that these discs can
be played back on all DVD players.)
• Recordings onto DVD-RW/R discs using the Video mode
employ a new standard approved by the DVD Forum in
2000, and compatibility with this standard is left to the
discretion of the respective DVD player manufacturer.
Consequently, there are some models of DVD players
and DVD-ROM drives that are unable to play back DVDRW/R discs. (Consult the maker of your device to
determine whether it supports playback.)
• “Copy Once” programmes cannot be recorded.
• When bilingual broadcast is recorded, only the audio
selected out of Lch and Rch will be recorded.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Recording Time
• The recording mode that can be set varies according to
the recording format. Refer to the table below for the
applicable recording mode. Recordable time is based on
the recording time when using a 4.7 GB disc.
Recording
Mode
Recordable Time
Description
XP
About 1 hour
When you want to record highquality images.
SP
About 2 hours
This is the standard recording
mode.
LP
About 4 hours
When you want to record for a long
period of time with slightly lower
EP
About 6 hours
image quality.
When you want to place priority on
recording time.
• Since recording capacity varies according to the
recorded material, there may be cases where there is
much more disc space remaining on the disc when
recording is completed.
• Refer to page 43 about the recordable times when you
choose “MN” (manual) Recording mode.
• Since recording to DVD is performed using VBR (variable
bit rate, refer to the section on VBR Control on page 126)
with the exception of some recording modes, recording
time varies according to the material to be recorded.
• Recordable time may be shorter than that indicated above in
the case of recording material of poor image quality such as
broadcasts from televisions with poor reception.
• This does not guarantee the length of recording time. Actual
recording time may be shorter than that indicated above
depending on image quality and other aspects.
• The total of recording time and remaining time may not always
agree with the recordable time of the recording mode.
• Block-like images may become conspicuous during scenes
containing rapid movement due to the characteristics of digital
image compression technology.
Disc Remaining Time
Æ VR mode
• Additional recordings can be made as long as there is
available space on the disc. (Additional recordings
can also be made after the disc is finalised.)
• Erasing unnecessary recordings lets you increase the
remaining time on the disc. (The disc can also be
erased after it has been finalised.)
• When a Play List (page 88) is created, disc space will
not increase even if portions of titles or titles of Play
List are erased.
Æ Video mode
• Additional recordings can be made with this Recorder
provided there is available space on the disc until the
disc is finalised.
• In case you record on a DVD-RW disc, recordable
time will increase if you erase the last recorded title
unless you finalise the DVD-RW disc.
• In case you record on a DVD-R disc, recordable time
will not increase even if you erase titles (page 95).
(The erase function only hides the title, it does not
actually erase it.)
About DVD
Using the Proper Disc
Unrecordable Material
Select the disc and recording format to be used
according to the objective of the recording.
Select the disc and recording format by referring
to the table below.
Objective
• When you want to play
back a recorded disc with
a DVD player or DVD
Video compatible PC
• When you want to
repeatedly record and
erase a recorded disc
Disc to Use
Recording Format
Recordable
Video mode
DVD-RW disc recording
Ver.1.1,
+
Ver.1.1 (CPRM finalisation
compatible),
Ver.1.1 /2x
(CPRM
compatible)
or Ver.1.2 /4x
(CPRM
compatible)
• When you want to edit
a disc recorded with
this Recorder
• When playing back with
a DVD-RW compatible
player with the
following indication
Recordable
DVD-RW disc
Ver.1.1, Ver.1.1
(CPRM
compatible),
Ver.1.1 /2x
(CPRM
compatible)
or Ver.1.2 /4x
(CPRM
compatible)
VR mode
recording
+
(finalisation)
• When you want to
record a “Copy Once”
satellite broadcast, etc.
Recordable
DVD-RW disc
Ver.1.1
(CPRM
compatible),
Ver.1.1 /2x
(CPRM
compatible)
or Ver.1.2 /4x
(CPRM
compatible)
VR mode
recording
• When you want to play
back a recorded disc with
a DVD player or DVD
Video compatible PC
• When not re-recording a
recorded disc (when
making a permanent
recording or when you
do not want the
recording to be erased)
Recordable
DVD-R disc
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0 /4x
Ver.2.0 /8x
Video mode
recording
+
finalisation
• When you want to
repeatedly record and
erase a recorded disc
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
4.7
Æ This Recorder is equipped with a copy guard
function that prevents recording of video software
or broadcast programmes that contain a signal that
restricts copying in accordance with copyrights and
so forth.
Example:
• DVD videos
• PPV (pay-per-view) broadcasts
Æ The proper image may not be obtained in the case
a copy guard signal is contained in the images
input from equipment connected to the external
input jacks (LINE 1, LINE 2, LINE IN 3 or DV IN*)
of this Recorder.
Example:
• Images not output at proper brightness
• Incorrect output of picture size and other data
Connect such equipment directly to your TV
without going through this Recorder.
* Only DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F is equipped with
DV IN.
Æ In the case a copy guard signal is contained in a
source video that occurs part way through recording, recording is paused at that point. Recording
resumes when the copy guard signal is no longer
present, while no recordings will be made for the
part where the copy prevention signal is present.
Initialisation and Finalisation
Initialisation (Formatting)
Initialisation is required when using DVD-RW discs in the Video mode. (See page 96 for details about Initialisation.)
When an unused DVD-RW disc is placed in the Recorder immediately after the disc has been purchased, the Recorder is set
to automatically begin initialising in the VR mode. The settings can also be changed so that discs are initialised in the Video
mode (“DVD AUTO INITIALISE” on page 105).
When using a DVD-RW disc in the Video mode without changing this setting, initialise the disc in the Video mode after first
completing initialisation in the VR mode (page 96).
• Initialisation entirely erases the contents of the disc.
• It takes about 1 minute to 1 and a half minutes for initialisation to be completed.
Allowing Discs to Be Played Back with Other DVD Players (Finalisation)
Discs must always be finalised in order to play them back with another DVD player after having been recorded in
the Video mode. (See page 96 for details about Finalisation.)
Finalise discs on which all recordings have been completed so that they can be viewed with another DVD player or a DVD
Video compatible PC. Discs that are not finalised may not be able to be played back with other DVD players or DVD Video
compatible PCs. (However, this does not guarantee that finalised discs can be played back on all DVD players or DVD Video
compatible PCs.)
• Finalising a DVD-R disc prevents all recording and editing of that disc.
• Although DVD-RW discs can be re-recorded by initialising even after they have been recorded in the Video mode and
finalised, all previously recorded contents are erased.
• Finalisation is required if a disc recorded in the VR mode cannot be played back with a DVD-RW compatible player. (Discs
formatted in the VR mode can be recorded and edited even after finalisation.)
• Finalisation takes from several minutes to about an hour. (Processing takes longer if there is considerable available space
on the disc.)
The following operations may cause malfunction.
• Operating discs recorded or edited by this Recorder, in a DVD recorder or PC’s DVD drive manufactured by other manufacturers.
• Using the discs in above situation again with this Recorder.
• Operating discs recorded or edited by a DVD recorder or PC’s DVD drive made by other manufacturers than Sharp.
About the Contents of the Disc
Title, Chapter and Track
• DVDs are divided into “Titles” and “Chapters”. If the disc
Example 1: DVD
has more than one movie on it, each movie would be a
separate “Title”. “Chapters”, on the other hand, are
subdivisions of titles. (See Example 1.)
Title 2
• Video CDs and Audio CDs are divided into “Tracks”. You
Title 1
can think of a “Track” as one tune on an Audio CD. (See
Example 2.)
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Recording on a DVD-RW/R disc
• One recording is treated as one title and the chapters will
be inserted automatically every 10 minutes. You can
Example 2: Video CD or Audio CD
choose the chapter interval from the following: 10
minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or off (page 104).
• Each title, chapter and track will be numbered in order.
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Title, chapter and track may not be numbered in some
discs.
Recording on a DVD-RW disc in VR mode
• When you pause during recording or erase the scene using edit function, chapter markers will be inserted automatically.
You can also insert chapter markers at your favourite scenes (page 86).
Recording in Video mode
• You cannot insert chapter markers at your favourite scenes.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
About the Contents of the Disc
Icons Used on DVD Video Disc Case
The back of the case of a DVD that is commercially
available usually contains various information about the
contents of the disc.
1
2
2
1. English
2. Chinese
3
2
4
16:9 LB
1. English
2. Chinese
x Subtitle languages
This indicates the kind of subtitles.
c Screen aspect ratio
Movies are shot in a variety of screen modes.
v Camera angle
Recorded onto some DVD discs are scenes which have
been simultaneously shot from a number of different
angles (the same scene is shot from the front, from the
left side, from the right side, etc.).
5
2
123
456
z Audio tracks and audio formats
DVD discs can contain up to 8 separate tracks with a
different language on each. The first in the list is the
original track.
This section also details the audio format of each
soundtrack—Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG etc.
Dolby Digital
A sound system developed by Dolby Laboratories Inc.
that gives movie theatre ambience to audio output when
the Recorder is connected to a Dolby Digital processor
or amplifier.
DTS
DTS is a digital sound system developed by Digital
Theater Systems for use in cinemas. This system uses 6
audio channels and provides accurate sound field
positioning and realistic acoustics. (By connecting a
DTS Digital Surround decoder, you can also listen to
DTS Digital Surround sound.)
Linear PCM
Linear PCM is a signal recording format used for Audio
CDs.
The sound on Audio CDs is recorded at 44.1 kHz with
16 bits. (On DVD discs, sound is recorded at between
48 kHz with 16 bits and 96 kHz with 24 bits.)
MPEG
MPEG Audio gives movie theatre ambience to audio
output when the Recorder is connected to an MPEG
Audio 5.1 channel processor or amplifier.
NOTE
• This Recorder supports 2-channel(L/R) audio and
5.1ch(Multi-channel) MPEG Audio 1/2(only when the
DIGITAL AUDIO Output COAXIAL jack is used for
connection). It does not support 7.1 channel MPEG
Audio Ver.2.0.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
b Region code
This indicates the region code (playable region
number).
The Icons Used in This
Operation Manual
HDD
...................... Indicates the functions that can be
performed for the hard disc.
DVD-RW
DVD-RW ... Indicates the functions that can be
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
performed for DVD-RW discs.
VR MODE:
• Indicates that the function will
operate when recording in VR mode
or playing back a disc recorded in
VR mode.
VIDEO MODE:
• Indicates that the function will
operate when recording in Video
mode or playing back a disc
recorded in Video mode.
DVD-R ................... Indicates the functions that can be
performed for DVD-R discs.
DVD VIDEO .............. Indicates the functions that can be
performed for DVD Video discs.
VIDEO CD .................. Indicates the functions that can be
performed for Video CDs.
AUDIO CD .................. Indicates the functions that can be
performed for Audio CDs.
CD-R
.................. Indicates the functions that can be
MP3
WMA
performed for CD-R discs in MP3 and
WMA format.
CD-RW .................. Indicates the functions that can be
MP3
WMA
performed for CD-RW discs in MP3
and WMA format.
CD-R
.................. Indicates the functions that can be
JPEG
performed for CD-R discs in JPEG
format.
CD-RW .................. Indicates the functions that can be
JPEG
performed for CD-RW discs in JPEG
format.
Important Information
Disc Precautions
Be Careful of Scratches and Dust
• DVD-RW and DVD-R discs are sensitive to dust, fingerprints and especially scratches. A scratched disc may
not be able to be recorded, or important data recorded
may not be able to be played back. Handle discs with
care and store them in a safe place.
Proper Disc Storage
Place the disc in the centre of
the disc case and store the
case and disc upright.
Avoid storing discs in locations
subject to direct sunlight, close
to heating appliances or in
locations of high humidity.
Do not drop discs or subject
them to strong vibrations or
impacts.
Avoid storing discs in locations
where there are large amounts
of dust or locations where mold
tends to grow easily.
Handling Precautions
• If the surface is soiled, wipe gently with a soft, damp
(water only) cloth. When wiping discs, always move the
cloth from the centre hole toward the outer edge.
• Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzene, thinner,
static electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
• Do not touch the surface.
• Do not stick paper or adhesive labels to the disc.
• If the playing surface of a disc is soiled or scratched, the
Recorder may decide that the disc is incompatible and
eject the disc tray, or it may fail to play the disc correctly.
Wipe any soiling off the playing surface with a soft cloth.
Cleaning the Pick Up Lens
• Never use commercially available cleaning discs. The
use of these discs can damage the lens.
• Request cleaning of the lens to the nearest service centre
approved by Sharp.
Warning of Dew Formation
• Dew may form on pick up lens or disc in the following
conditions:
• Immediately after a heater has been turned on.
• In a steamy or very humid room.
• When the Recorder is suddenly moved from a cold
environment to a warm one.
When dew forms:
It becomes difficult for the Recorder to read the signals
on the disc and prevents the Recorder from operating
properly.
To remove dew:
Take out the disc and leave the recorder with the power
off until the dew disappears. Using the recorder with
dew formation may cause malfunction.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Cautions Regarding Recording
Æ Always Make Sure to Test Record in Advance
• Make a test recording with a DVD-RW disc in advance
of making any important recordings to confirm whether
or not the material to record is recorded properly.
Æ Compensation for Failed Recordings
• In the event a recording is unsuccessful due to a
problem with this Recorder or a disc, or due to an
external factor such as a power failure or condensation of moisture and so forth, the manufacturer is not
responsible for compensation for unrecorded contents
or incidental damages.
Copyright
• Audio-visual material may consist of copyrighted works
which must not be recorded without the authority of the
owner of the copyright. Please refer to relevant laws in
your country.
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology
must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Apparatus Claims of U.S. Patent Nos. 4,631,603;
4,819,098; 4,907,093; 5,315,448; and 6,516,132
licensed for limited viewing uses only.
• GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW, VIDEO Plus+, G-LINK are (1)
registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured
under license from and (3) subject of various international
patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to,
Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related
affiliates.
• GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR
ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE
FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAMME
SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE
PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV
GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED
AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS
REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH
THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION,
EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE
PLUS+ SYSTEM.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
• Certain audio features of this product manufactured
under a license from Desper Products, Inc. Spatializer ®
N-2-2™ and the circle-in-square device are trademarks
owned by Desper Products, Inc.
• i.LINK refers to the IEEE 1394-1995 industry specification
and extensions thereof. The
logo is used for products
compliant with the i.LINK standard.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
•
Corporation.
Major Components
Main Unit (Front)
1
2 3 18
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
4
8
9 10 11 12
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
13 14 15 16 17
6
7
OPERATE (p. 25)
STANDBY indicator (p. 25)
TIMER indicator (p. 49)
Disc tray (p. 41)
OPEN/CLOSE (p. 41)
RESET (p. 120)
LINE IN 3 (p. 103)
• AUDIO Input jacks
• VIDEO Input jack
• S-VIDEO Input jack
DV IN terminal (DV-HR480F/
DV-HR450F only) (p. 100)
HDD REC STOP (p. 40)
HDD Æ REC (p. 35)
HDD ■ STOP (p. 35)
HDD | PLAY (p. 35)
DVD | PLAY (p. 35)
DVD ■ STOP (p. 35)
DVD Æ REC (p. 35)
DVD REC STOP (p. 42)
CHANNEL "/'
Infrared receptor
Front Panel Display
1
2
3
8
4
5
6
7
11
3 Title indicator (p. 34)
4 Dubbing indicator (p. 62)
5 HDD Mode indicator (p. 35)
6 Recording Mode indicator (p. 39)
7 DVD indicator (p. 23)
8 Decoder indicator
9 Chapter indicator (p. 34)
10 Information Display (p. 34)
11 DVD Mode indicator (p. 35)
12 Tamper Proof indicator (p. 39)
13 Simple Recording Timer indicator (p. 40)
9
10
12
13
1 PDC/VPS indicator
2 Disc Remaining Time indicator (p. 34)
Main Unit (Rear)
5 COMPONENT Video Output jacks
(p. 24)
12
1
2
5
6
9
6 VIDEO Output jack (p. 24)
7 AUDIO Output jacks (p. 98)
8 S-VIDEO Output jack (p. 24)
9 G-LINK jack (p. 23)
10 DIGITAL AUDIO Output COAXIAL jack
(p. 98)
11 DIGITAL AUDIO Output OPTICAL
3
4
7
8 10 11
1 ANTENNA OUT jack (p. 23)
2 ANTENNA IN jack (p. 23)
3 21-pin Euro-SCART (LINE 1 (TV)) (p. 23)
Y/C (OUT), RGB (OUT), COMPOSITE (IN/OUT)
21-pin Euro-SCART (LINE 2 (DECODER/EXT)) (p. 23)
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
4
12
terminal (DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only)
(p. 98)
Cooling Fan
The cooling fan operates while the power
to the Recorder is on. It also operates in
some cases even when the power is
turned off, such as when the Timer
Recording is in progress or when EPG
data (TV listings) is being downloaded.
Major Components
Remote Control Unit
1
2
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
3
*
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
*(
button)
To change between single digit and two-digit
channel numbers, press the key with “*”
above (below 7 key). For example, to enter
“24”, press this key and then “24”. Also this
key is used to switch between UHF/VHF and
CATV in the case of Manual Tuning.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
OPERATE (p. 25)
OPEN/CLOSE (p. 41)
Number buttons (pp. 21, 42)
TIMER ON/OFF (p. 49)
TV/DVD (p. 23)
START MENU (p. 27)
HDD (p. 35)
REC LIST/DVD TOP MENU (pp. 65, 74)
Cursor buttons (' /" /\ /|) (pp. 26, 27)
EXIT (p. 27)
Red (A), Green (B), Yellow (C), Blue (D) (p. 65)
REV (pp. 37, 67, 71)
STILL/PAUSE (pp. 37, 67, 72)
■ STOP/LIVE (pp. 37, 65, 70)
F.ADV
, DAY– /+,
SKIP
(pp. 67,
71, 72)
Æ REC (pp. 40, 42)
REC STOP (pp. 40, 42)
TV CONTROL buttons (p. 21)
CH " /' , PAGE UP/DOWN (pp. 39, 42, 50)
DIRECT (p. 66)
INFORMATION (p. 50)
ERASE (p. 52)
TIME SHIFT (p. 37)
REC MODE (p. 39)
GUIDE (p. 46)
INPUT (pp. 68, 72, 73)
DVD (p. 35)
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST/DVD MENU
(pp. 65, 76, 82)
SET/ENTER (pp. 25, 27)
n RETURN (p. 27)
| PLAY (pp. 37, 65, 69)
FWD (pp. 37, 67, 71)
SLOW (pp. 67)
REPLAY (pp. 67, 72)
SKIP SEARCH (pp. 67, 72)
CHAPTER MARK (pp. 40, 69)
REC PAUSE (pp. 40, 42)
ANGLE (p. 73)
FUNCTION (p. 77)
DIRECT REC TV (p. 44)
RGB OFF (pp. 24, 39, 41)
AUDIO (pp. 32, 68, 73)
SUBTITLE (p. 73)
DISPLAY/BACKLIGHT (p. 34)
ON SCREEN (p. 32)
TAMPER PROOF (p. 39)
Major Components
Loading the Batteries
1
•
•
•
•
•
While pressing Y down,
slide the battery cover in
the direction of the
arrow.
2
Load the batteries.
Load the two R-03 size batteries (“AAA”
size, UM/SUM-4) supplied with the
remote control unit. Make sure that the
battery poles
and
are positioned
as indicated.
3
Slide the battery cover
in the direction of the
arrow until it clicks.
NOTE
Do not subject the remote control unit to shock, water or excessive humidity.
The remote control unit may not function if the Recorder’s remote sensor is in direct sunlight or any other strong light.
Incorrect use of batteries may cause them to leak or burst. Read the battery warnings and use the batteries properly.
Do not mix old and new batteries, or mix different brands.
Remove the batteries if you will not use the remote control unit for an extended period of time.
Operating range of remote control
Remote sensor
About 30° About 30°
Front 7m
Remote control
unit
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Major Components
Operating a TV Using the
Remote Control
(Universal Remote Control)
The Universal Remote Control may operate the
basic functions of 18 different types of TVs.
To enter the Manufacturer’s Code for your TV,
follow the instructions below.
There is no guarantee that the universal
remote control will function with your TV.
Setting the
Manufacturer’s Code
1
2
3
Press OPERATE of TV CONTROL and CH ' of TV
CONTROL simultaneously.
Enter the 2-digit Manufacturer’s
Code with the Number buttons
(Ex. 02-“0”, “2”) within 10
seconds after releasing
OPERATE of TV CONTROL and
CH ' of TV CONTROL.
Point the remote control unit
towards the TV and then press
OPERATE of TV CONTROL.
• If the TV turns on/off, setup was
successful. If not, repeat the procedure using another code.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
See the list below for the Manufacturer’s Code
and the buttons which work.
TV Brand
FERGUSON
GRUNDIG
HITACHI
ITT NOKIA
JVC
LOEWE 1
LOEWE 2
MITSUBISHI
PANASONIC 1
PANASONIC 2
PHILIPS
SANYO
SHARP 1
SHARP 2
SONY
THOMSON 1
THOMSON 2
TOSHIBA
Manufacturer’s Code
07
06
13
08
15
17
18
16
11
12
03
14
01
02
09
04
05
10
TV function control
•
•
•
•
TV Power: OPERATE
TV Channel up/down: CH ' / "
TV Volume up/down: VOL +/TV-AV Selector: INPUT
NOTE
• If the batteries in the remote control unit are
replaced, the code settings must be reentered.
• Some brands have more than one code
listed above, due to changes in the codes.
In such cases, try another code to find the
code that operates your TV.
Major Components
Setting the Remote
Control Code
• Two types of remote control codes operate
this Recorder: RC-1 and RC-2. If you
operate this Recorder by remote control
along with another SHARP DVD recorder or
DVD player placed next to it simultaneously, switching the remote control code
(both the Recorder and remote control) to
one of the signals (RC-1 or RC-2) will let
you operate only with this Recorder.
• Make sure to set the Recorder and remote
control to the same remote code. You can
not operate the Recorder if they are not set
to the same code.
Setting the Remote Control Code of the Remote
Example: Setting the code to “RC-2”.
1
Press and hold OPERATE and 2
together for more than 5 seconds.
2
Press OPERATE of this Recorder
to see if you can turn it on/off.
• If you cannot, go to step 3.
• To change the setting back to “RC-1”,
press and hold OPERATE and 1 in
the step 1 above.
Front Panel
Display
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Setting the Remote Control Code of the Recorder
3
Press OPERATE to turn off the
Recorder.
4
Press and hold CHANNEL " and
CHANNEL ' on the Recorder
together for more than 5 seconds.
• Each time this operation is performed,
the code of the Recorder toggles
between “RC-1” and “RC-2”. The front
panel display changes as the code
changes.
• Press OPERATE on the remote
control to see if you can turn on/off
the Recorder.
If remote control does not
work
Press OPERATE on the remote control and
check the front panel display (RC-1 or RC-2).
Set the remote control code according to the
display and press OPERATE to see if you
can turn on/off the Recorder.
Basic Connection
1
Connection Using Aerial Cables and SCART
Cables
The following connection is the basic connection to watch or record TV
programmes.
2
Important!
• Be sure to turn off and unplug from the AC outlet this Recorder and all
equipment before connecting the cables.
• Read through the operation manual for the equipment to be connected.
3
NOTE
• To connect using S-video or
component cables, see “Using Other
Types of Video Output” on page 24.
1
To ANTENNA
IN jack
Aerial cable
(commercially available)
4
6
To LINE 1(TV)
SCART
2
3
Coaxial cable
(supplied)
SCART cable
(commercially
available)
To SCART
input
To antenna
input jack
To LINE 2
SCART
6
4
5
SCART cable
(commercially
available)
G-LINK
cable
(supplied)
Infrared Transmitter
Connect the LINE 1(TV)
jack on the rear of this
Recorder to the SCART
input jack on your TV
using the SCART cable
(commercially available).
5
Connect the LINE 2(DECODER/EXT) jack on the
rear of this Recorder to the
SCART output jack on your
external receiver using the
SCART cable.
Connect the G-LINK jack
on the rear of this
Recorder with the external
receiver using G-LINK
cable (supplied). Fix the
infrared transmitter of the
G-LINK cable as described
below left. (See page 46)
• If you use DVB-T (Digital Video
Broadcasting Terrestrial),
connect the TV aerial cable to
the DVB-T and the DVB-T to
the ANTENNA IN jack of the
Recorder (see 6 in the chart)
instead of the connection in
the Step 1 above (see 1 in the
chart).
To SCART
output
TV
Connect the ANTENNA
OUT jack on the rear of
this Recorder to the
antenna input jack on your
TV using the supplied
coaxial cable.
When connecting with your
external receiver
The Recorder
To ANTENNA
OUT jack
Connect the TV aerial
cable to the ANTENNA IN
jack on the rear of this
Recorder.
The external receiver
(satellite system,
cable TV set-top box
or DVB-T(Digital
Video Broadcasting
Terrestrial))
NOTE
• Even when you use an external
receiver, you must connect the
Recorder to Aerial via ANTENNA IN
jack.
Fix the Infrared Transmitter in
front of the infrared receptor.
Important!
When connecting to your TV using SCART cable:
• When playing back HDD/DVD, the recorder side input is selected
automatically. When the channel is changed at the TV side under this
setting, the selection is normally changed to the reception channel, but it
may not be changed for certain TV models. If this happens, press the TV/
DVD button on the remote control.
• Progressive Sharp
outputManuals
works only when the Recorder is connected with TV by
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com
Component video cable.
• According to the input signal from
the external equipment to L2, you
must select the type of video signal
(S-VIDEO or RGB/COMPOSITE) in
“L2” setting. This can be done in
“OTHER SETTINGS” – “ADJUSTMENT” – “VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING”
– “CONNECTING TERMINAL”.
Basic Connection
Using Other Types of Video Output
In order to view clearer DVD images, it is recommended that you use a commercially available S-video or component video cable when connecting your TV to the
video output.
Connecting Using
an S-video or Video/
Audio Cable
TV
Connect the S-VIDEO or VIDEO
Output jack on this Recorder to
the S-video or video input jack
on your TV using an S-video
cable (commercially available)
or Video/Audio cable (supplied).
To S-video
input jack
To video/audio
input jacks
or
S-video cable
(commercially available)
Video/Audio cable
(supplied)
To VIDEO/AUDIO
output jacks
NOTE
• When connecting both S-video
cable and Video/Audio cable to the
Recorder, the image of S-video
cable is displayed.
• Progressive output works only when
the Recorder is connected with TV by
Component video cable.
To S-VIDEO
output jack
The Recorder
Connecting Using
the component
Video Cable
TV
Connect the COMPONENT OUT
jacks on this Recorder to the
component input jacks on your
TV using a component video
cable (commercially available).
To audio
input jacks
To component
input jacks
Component video cable
(commercially available) To AUDIO
output jacks
The Recorder
To COMPONENT
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
OUT jacks
Video/Audio cable
(supplied)
Important!
When using this connection:
• If the option under “START MENU”
- “OTHER SETTINGS” - “ADJUSTMENT” - “VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING”
- “CONNECTING TERMINAL” “LINE 1 OUT” is changed to
“RGB”, no picture is displayed on
the TV. In this case, hold down the
RGB OFF button on the remote
control (under the cover) for more
than 2 seconds.
• If you set the option “LINE 1 OUT”
(see above) as “RGB”, the
progressive output does not work.
• If your TV is compatible with
progressive-scan component
video, set “PROGRESSIVE OUT
SET” to “YES”. (Page 108)
Auto Installation(INSTALLATION AUTO)
Turning the Power On
Press OPERATE on the remote
control or Recorder to turn on the
power of Recorder.
• When you turn on power, the HDD mode
indicator and DVD mode indicator in the
Front Panel Display will blink. As the
system processing is in progress during
blinking, wait until the blinking stops and
the HDD mode indicator turns on.
• When the Recorder power is turned on for the
first time after purchase, the “AUTO
INSTALLATION” screen is displayed. Follow
the procedure shown on pages 25, 26.
NOTE
Operating the power source while TV
listings data is being downloaded
• Even when the power is off, during
download of TV listings data, the internal
state of the power source is on. When you
want to use the Recorder while TV listings
data is being downloaded, press OPERATE to cause the STANDBY indicator of the
Recorder to be lit red. (It may take 1-2
minutes for the STANDBY indicator to be lit
red.) After the STANDBY indicator is lit red,
press OPERATE button once more. (The
download of TV listings data will be
suspended.)
• When TV listings data is being downloaded, the Front Panel Display appears as
follows:
About the Power Supply
• Do not unplug the power cord immediately after you plug it into the AC outlet
(less than about 15 seconds after
plugging in). In very rare cases, this
may cause the memory to revert to its
initial state, and all timer programmes
will be erased. If you pull out the power
plug while power is on, it will take a
while for the hard disc to get ready
when you turn on power the next time.
During this time you can only view live
broadcasts.
• If you turn on power in a low temperature environment, only live broadcast
viewing is possible until the hard disc
(HDD) reaches its operating temperature.
Using the INSTALLATION
AUTO
for Initial Setting
When the Recorder power is turned on for the
first time after purchase, the “INSTALLATION
AUTO(AUTO INSTALLATION)” screen is
displayed. You can use the “INSTALLATION
AUTO(AUTO INSTALLATION)” function for
easy initial settings regarding On-Screen
Display language, TV channel, etc. From the
second time on, the “AUTO INSTALLATION”
screen will not appear.
Preparation
• Turn on the power of TV and switch to the
AV input used to connect to the Recorder.
To Turn the Power Off
1
Press OPERATE for the first time
after purchase.
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
Press OPERATE on the remote
control or Recorder to turn off power.
INSTALLATION AUTO
• The HDD mode indicator and DVD mode
indicator will go out, and the STANDBY
indicator will light up.
• If you press OPERATE again immediately
after turning off, the Recorder may not turn
on. If this happens, wait a while and then
turn on power again.
L'INSTALLATION AUTO DÉMARRE AUTOMATIQUEMENT:
APPUYER SUR LA TOUCHE ENTER
INSTALLATION AUTO
ENTRER
ENTER
ENTER
• The “INSTALLATION AUTO(AUTO
INSTALLATION)” screen is displayed.
2
Press SET/ENTER to continue
with the installation.
INSTALLATION AUTO [LANGUE]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
SÉLECTIONNER LA LANGUE D'AFFICHAGE.
ENGLISH
ESPAÑOL
DEUTSCH
SVENSKA
FRANÇAIS
NEDERLANDS
ITALIANO
• The “LANGUE(LANGUAGE)” screen
is displayed.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Continued on Next Page |||
Auto Installation(INSTALLATION AUTO)
3
Select the On-Screen Display
language you want to display on
the screen using ' / " / \ / |,
then press SET/ENTER.
NOTE
• To change the On-Screen Display language afterwards, select “DISPLAY
LANGUAGE” in the “START MENU”.
INSTALLATION AUTO [PAYS]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
NOTE
• A maximum of 84 channels can be set.
• You can change channel positions in
GUIDE Plus+ system. (Change Channel
Settings, page 56)
• Ensure that your aerial cable is connected
to the Recorder, even when channels are
installed via SCART cable.
7
SELECT YOUR COUNTRY.
AUSTRIA
ITALY
BELGIUM
NORWAY
DENMARK
PORTUGAL
• Refer to “Clock Setting” on page 29.
INSTALLATION AUTO [HORLOGE]
FINLAND
SPAIN
GERMANY
SWEDEN
NETHERLANDS
SWITZERLAND
FRANCE
OTHERS (B/G)
OTHERS (D/K)
Select the country where you live
using ' / " / \ / | , then press
SET/ENTER.
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
INSTALLATION AUTO
CONFIRM THAT THE ANTENNA CABLE/SCART
IS CONNECTED TO THE UNIT
AND THEN PRESS ENTER KEY.
14 : 28
5
6
ENTER
Ensure your Aerial cable or SCART
cable is connected to the Recorder,
then press SET/ENTER to confirm.
All available terrestrial channels
will be automatically installed.
■ When connecting with SCART
cable
INSTALLATION AUTO [SYNTONISATION AUTOMATIQUE]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
PLEASE WAIT.
DOWNLOADING.
PR 25
INSTALLATION AUTO [SYNTONISATION AUTOMATIQUE]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
PLEASE WAIT.
RECEIVING DATA.
PR12
■ When connecting with Aerial
cable
INSTALLATION AUTO [SYNTONISATION AUTOMATIQUE]
1
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
CH 0 2
AUTO TUNING HAS STARTED. PLEASE WAIT.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DATE
24 / 12 [ SAT ]
YEAR
ADJUST
2005
AUTO
SELECT AUTO IN ADJUST AND SUMMER-TIME IS AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.
SET
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
NOTE
• If “ADJUST” is set to “OFF”, then you will
need to update the clock for summer time.
8
ENTER
ENTER
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
SET THE CURRENT DATE AND TIME
TIME
• The “PAYS(COUNTRY)” screen is
displayed.
4
Then, the “HORLOGE(CLOCK)”
setting screen is automatically
displayed.
After setting the clock, press
SET/ENTER to end the INSTALLATION AUTO procedure.
Important!
• You can perform the INSTALLATION AUTO
function afterward by selecting the menu
items as follows: “START MENU” - “OTHER
SETTINGS” - “ADJUSTMENT” - “AUTO
INSTALLATION”.
NOTE
• When you install the Recorder using
SCART cable, it (AV LINK function)will work
only if you connect to TV with with AV Link
function.
About START MENU
About START MENU
With this Recorder, you can call up functions like Playback, Edit and Other Settings from the
“START MENU”. For details on operation procedures, see the page explaining each option.
1
2
3
START MENU [REC LIST]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
DISPLAYS THE RECORDED PROGRAM AS A TABLE. AND THEN PLAY BACK/EDIT, ETC.
4
5
6
7
1 REC LIST
DISPLAYS THE RECORDED PROGRAMME
AS A TABLE. AND THEN PLAY BACK/EDIT,
ETC.
• Playing back with REC LIST… page 65
• Calling up various functions… page 80
• Editing with the Original Title List/
Play List… page 83
2 ERASE
ERASES THE RECORDED PROGRAMME.
• Protecting titles from erasure… page 94
• Erasing all recorded titles… page 95
• Erasing selected titles… page 95
3 DUBBING
DUBS THE RECORDED PROGRAMME.
• High speed dubbing… page 61
• Rate conversion dubbing… page 61
4 TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK
SETS TIMER PROGRAMME AND CONFIRMS
TIMER PROGRAMME CONTENT.
• The “One-Button-Record” Feature… page 49
• Timer recording with SHOWVIEW®… page 51
• Timer recording by designating date and
time… page 53
• Checking/Changing timer settings… page 55
5 INITIALISE/FINALISE
INITIALISES HDD/DVD AND FINALISES DVD.
• DVD/HDD initialisation… page 96
• DVD finalisation… page 96
6 OTHER SETTINGS
DISPLAYS SETTING BEFORE REC/
PLAYBACK.
• Rec function set… page 104
• View/Play set… page 107
• Adjustment… page 111
• Control set… page 115
7 LANGUAGE SETTING
SET THE LANGUAGE TO BE DISPLAYED IN
THE OSD.
• Changing Language Setting… page 28
Basic START MENU Operation
1
Press START MENU to display
the “START MENU” screen.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select an
option.
3
• The screen for the selected option will
appear.
• Operate using ' / " / \ / | and SET/
ENTER.
Example: When
(“OTHER SETTINGS”) is selected
START MENU [OTHER SETTINGS]
OTHER SETTINGS [REC FUNCTION]
REC FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SET
ADJUSTMENT
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
CONTROL SET
REC MODE SETTING
AUDIO REC TYPE SET
EXTERNAL IN AUDIO
BILINGUAL SETTING
AUTO CHAPTER SETTING
4
DISPLAYS SETTINGS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK
Press SET/ENTER to enter the
selected option.
Press START MENU or EXIT to
quit the START MENU.
• The “START MENU” screen will close,
and the screen will return to normal.
NOTE
• If you perform no operation, the “START MENU” screen will disappear after about 1 minute.
• This operation will not work at the following times:
During playback, during Time Shift Viewing, during display of the REC LIST, and at the erase
screen.
• If you make a mistake in operation and want to start over, press RETURN to go back to the
preceding screen.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Language Setting
About Language Setting
You can select the language to display on the
screen of this Recorder. You can and would
normally do so during the “AUTO INSTALLATION” when you start using this Recorder for
the first time. (Page 25) Here, from this menu
option, you can reselect display language to
change to a new one, at any time.
Changing Language Setting
1
Press START MENU to display
the “START MENU” screen.
START MENU [REC LIST]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
DISPLAYS THE RECORDED PROGRAM AS A TABLE. AND THEN PLAY BACK/EDIT, ETC.
NOTE
• To select the DVD disc language, such as
subtitle etc., see page 74.
SELECT
2
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(“LANGUAGE SETTING”), then
press SET/ENTER.
START MENU [LANGUAGE SETTING]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
SET THE LANGUAGE TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE OSD.
3
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
language you want to display on
the screen, then press SET/
ENTER.
START MENU [LANGUAGE SETTING]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
SELECT DISPLAY LANGUAGE.
ENGLISH
ESPAÑOL
DEUTSCH
SVENSKA
FRANÇAIS
NEDERLANDS
ITALIANO
4
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Press START MENU or EXIT to
quit.
Clock Setting
6
Clock Setting
• For example, for 24th December
enter 24 and 12 respectively.
The clock will normally be set using the
VPS/PDC information when your
Recorder automatically tunes in the
broadcast channels. If for any reason the
VPS/PDC signals are not present, your
Recorder will not be able to set the clock.
This procedure will allow you to set the
clock.
1
OTHER SETTINGS [ADJUSTMENT: CLOCK SETTING]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
SET THE CURRENT DATE AND TIME
TIME
14 : 28
DATE
24 / 12 [ SAT ]
YEAR
ADJUST
2005
AUTO
DAY/MONTH
SELECT AUTO IN ADJUST AND SUMMER-TIME IS AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.
Press START MENU to
display the “START MENU”
screen.
START MENU [REC LIST]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
DISPLAYS THE RECORDED PROGRAM AS A TABLE. AND THEN PLAY BACK/EDIT, ETC.
SELECT
2
Enter the “DAY”, then “MONTH”
in a similar way as the Step 5.
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
EXIT
SET
SELECT
7
8
EXIT
ENTER
ENTER
Enter the “YEAR” in a similar way
as the Step 5.
Automatic Clock Setting
Press ' / " to select “AUTO” or
“OFF” in the “ADJUST” field. If
“AUTO” is selected, the clock will
be automatically adjusted.
OTHER SETTINGS [ADJUSTMENT: CLOCK SETTING]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
SET THE CURRENT DATE AND TIME
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(“OTHER SETTINGS”), then
press SET/ENTER.
TIME
14 : 28
DATE
24 / 12 [ SAT ]
YEAR
ADJUST
2005
AUTO
SELECT AUTO IN ADJUST AND SUMMER-TIME IS AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.
3
Press \ / | to select “ADJUSTMENT”.
SET
SELECT
OTHER SETTINGS [ADJUSTMENT]
REC FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SET
ADJUSTMENT
CLOCK SETTING
AUTO INSTALLATION
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING
DV SETTING
BLUE SCREEN SETTING
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
4
Press ' / " to select “CLOCK
SETTING”, then press SET/
ENTER.
5
Enter the “TIME” using ' / " .
Then press SET/ENTER or |
to proceed to the next field.
OTHER SETTINGS [ADJUSTMENT: CLOCK SETTING]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
SET THE CURRENT DATE AND TIME
TIME
14 : 28
DATE
24 / 12 [ SAT ]
YEAR
ADJUST
2005
AUTO
SELECT AUTO IN ADJUST AND SUMMER-TIME IS AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.
SET
SELECT
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
NOTE
• If “ADJUST” is set to “OFF”, then you will
need to update the clock for summer time.
9
SELECT
ENTER
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
CONTROL SET
Press SET/ENTER or | to
complete the entry, then press
SET/ENTER to confirm.
NOTE
• The Automatic Clock Setting (selecting
“AUTO” for “ADJUST” field) functions only
if the Recorder is tuned to Preset Channel
01 at the time of the setting.
Channel Setting
Channel Setting
This Recorder can receive a maximum of 84
channels by presetting the channels into
memory.
1
Press START MENU to display
the “START MENU” screen.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(“OTHER SETTINGS”), then press
SET/ENTER.
START MENU [OTHER SETTINGS]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
8
Press ' / " to select “FINE
TUNING”. Then press and hold \ /
| until the sharpest colour picture
is obtained.
9
Press ' / " to select “DECODER”. This is preset to “OFF”.
If you connect a decoder, you
must use \ / | to turn the decoder
function “ON”.
10 Press ' / " to select “SKIP”,
then press \ / | to select “ON” or
“OFF”.
• The SKIP function determines
whether the channel can be selected
when using the CH ' / " instead of
the Number buttons.
11 Press ' / " to select “SYSTEM”,
DISPLAYS SETTINGS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
3
Press \ / | to select “VIEW/PLAY
SET”.
4
Press ' /" to select “CHANNEL
SETTING”, then press SET/
ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS [VIEW/PLAY SET: CHANNEL SETTING]
REC FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SET
ADJUSTMENT
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
CONTROL SET
DVD PLAYBACK SETTING
CHANNEL SETTING
PROGRESSIVE OUT SET
PIC QUALITY CONTROL
PASSWORD SETTING
SELECT
5
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
Press ' / " to select “MANUAL
TUNING”, then press SET/
ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS [VIEW/PLAY SET: CHANNEL SETTING]
MANUAL TUNING
DELETE
NAME
NICAM
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
\ 1 |
PRESET
CHANNEL
CH2
\
FINE TUNING
|
DECODER
ON
OFF
SKIP
ON
OFF
L
B/G
SYSTEM
D/K
6
Press ' / " to select “PRESET”,
then press \ / | to choose the
required preset channel.
7
Press ' / " to select “CHANNEL”, then press \ / | to start
tuning in either direction.
• If it is not the desired channel, press
\ / | to continue tuning.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
then press \ / | to select “L”, “B/
G” or “D/K”.
12 Press SET/ENTER to store this
channel.
• If any more channels are to be tuned
in, repeat this procedure.
• Once all the channels have been
tuned in, press START MENU or
EXIT to return to the normal screen.
NOTE
• To switch between UHF/VHF and CATV,
.
press
Channel Setting
Deleting Channels
Re-naming Channels
If there is a channel you want to delete from
the Recorder memory, follow the procedure
below.
1
2
Press START MENU to display
the “START MENU” screen.
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(“OTHER SETTINGS”), then press
SET/ENTER.
3
Press \ / | to select “VIEW/PLAY
SET”.
4
Press ' / " to select “CHANNEL
SETTING”, then press SET/
ENTER.
5
Press ' / " to select “DELETE”,
then press SET/ENTER.
6
Press ' / " / \ / | to highlight the
channel to be deleted.
7
Press SET/ENTER twice to
delete the channel.
OTHER SETTINGS [VIEW/PLAY SET: CHANNEL SETTING]
MANUAL TUNING
DELETE
NAME
NICAM
When your Recorder tunes in broadcast
channels automatically, it names them using
the VPS/PDC information. You can change the
name of the channel with the following
procedure.
1
Press START MENU to display
the “START MENU” screen.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(“OTHER SETTINGS”), then press
SET/ENTER.
3
Press \ / | to select “VIEW/PLAY
SET”.
4
Press ' / " to select “CHANNEL
SETTING”, then press SET/
ENTER.
5
Press ' / " to select “NAME”,
then press SET/ENTER.
6
Press ' / " / \ / | to highlight the
channel to be re-named. Then
press SET/ENTER.
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
OTHER SETTINGS [VIEW/PLAY SET: CHANNEL SETTING]
DELETE CHANNEL
1
2
3
4
5
6
TF1
FRA2
FRA3
CAN+
FRA5
M6
7
8
9
10
11
12
MANUAL TUNING
DELETE
NAME
NICAM
13
14
15
16
17
18
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
CHANGE CHANNEL NAME
1
2
3
4
5
6
CAN1
FRA2
FRA3
CAN+
FRA5
M6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
SELECTED: TF1
ENTER
ENTER
OTHER SETTINGS [VIEW/PLAY SET: CHANNEL SETTING]
MANUAL TUNING
DELETE
NAME
NICAM
RETURN
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
SELECT
7
DELETE CHANNEL
1
2
3
4
5
6
FRA2
FRA3
FRA3
CAN+
FRA5
M6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
8
SELECT
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
To enter a new channel name use
' / " to scroll through the
characters and \ / | to move to
the next position. Then press
SET/ENTER.
If any more channels are to be renamed, repeat the procedure from
step 6 to 7.
Display Information
• When pressed during live
broadcast, the channel information
(see left) is displayed.
• The HDD information screen is
displayed as follows, when pressed
during playback.
Channel Information
When the power is turned on or the channel is
switched, channel information is displayed as follows:
PR 2 ARD NICAM STEREO
L R
2
12 3 4 5
3
HD D
OR I G I N AL
DVD-RW
VR ORIGINAL
XP REMAIN 0h10m
1
X P REMAIN 19 h10m
4
Display automatically
disappears in 5 seconds.
1
2
3
4
5
Preset channel
Channel name
NICAM signal reception
Stereo/Bilingual (I/II) signal reception
Audio output mode display
NOTE
• You can also display the channel information by pressing ON SCREEN (under the
cover) during live broadcast. In this case,
the display disappears in one minute.
• The channel information cannot be
displayed by pressing ON SCREEN (under
the cover) during playback and TIME
SHIFT viewing.
• If you press ON SCREEN (under the cover)
while the channel information is displayed,
information on remaining time and number
of titles is displayed (see above right). If
you press ON SCREEN (under the cover)
again, the display will disappear.
Monitor Output when Receiving a Stereo or Bilingual
Broadcast
5
6
7
1 / 33
4 /6
0 0 : 00 : 28
/ 0 0 : 20 : 30
TI TL E RE PE AT
LIVE
1
3
1 Original title playback/Play List playback indicator
2 Mode display
• Playback .................
• Playback stopped ..
(blue)
• Recording start .......
• Recording stopped
(red)
• Recording paused . (red)
• Recording ............... (red)
• Stopped .................. (blue)
3 Selected recording mode and the
amount of recording time remaining
(possible recording time).
4 Title number or total number of titles
during recording or playback.
5 Chapter number or total number of
chapters in the indicated title during
recording or playback. (When stopped,
the total number of chapters on the disc
is displayed.)
6 Counter/Total time of the current title
7 Repeat Playback indicator
REC
LIVE
LIVE
2
Press ON SCREEN (under the
cover) or HDD again.
• When pressed during playback or
recording, the screen changes to the
counter display.
When receiving a bilingual broadcast, press
AUDIO (under the cover) to change the audio
output mode to select Monitor Output. See the
table on page 109 for details.
0 0:0 0:5 1
/ 0 0:2 0:0 0
Checking Remaining Time of
HDD and Number of Titles
When the HDD mode indicator is
displayed in the Front Panel Display
(HDD mode)
1
Press ON SCREEN (under the
cover) or HDD.
NOTE
• The channel information cannot be viewed
during playback, Time Shift Viewing,
Chasing Playback, or Simultaneous
Recording.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
3
Press ON SCREEN (under the
cover) or HDD again.
• Display is turned off.
NOTE
• The HDD information screen (step 1) will
automatically disappear in 1 minute.
• The counter display (step 2) will not
disappear automatically. Press
ON SCREEN (under the cover) or HDD to
turn it off.
• When you press DISPLAY (under the
cover) while DV is being input, the control
panel is displayed. (DV-HR480F/DVHR450F only)
Display Information
Checking Remaining Time of
DVD and Number of Titles
2
• When pressed during playback, the
screen changes to the counter
display.
When DVD mode indicator is displayed in the Front Panel Display
(DVD mode)
1
0 0:00:24
/ 0 0:20:00
Press ON SCREEN (under the
cover) or DVD.
• When pressed during live broadcast,
the channel information (see the left
top screen on page 32) is displayed.
• The DVD information screen is
displayed as follows, when pressed
during playback.
LIVE HDD
ORIGINAL
XP REMAIN 20h39m
10
10
DVD-RW
VR OR I G I N AL
X P REMAIN 0h49m
1 / 7
1 / 1
0 0 : 0 0 : 1 2
/ 0 0 : 2 0 : 3 0
TI TL E RE PE AT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 Disc type, recording format, original title
playback/Play List playback indicators
2 Mode display
• Playback .................
• Playback stopped ..
(blue)
• Recording start .......
• Recording stopped
(red)
• Recording paused .
(red)
• Recording ...............
(red)
• Stopped ..................
(blue)
3 Recording mode and remaining
(recordable) time
• “FINALISED” indicator when a
finalised disc is played back.
4 Current title number/Total number of
titles
• Total number of titles (Stop mode)
• Title number currently played back
(Playback mode)
• Title number currently recorded
(Recording mode)
5 Current chapter number/Total number of
chapters
• Total number of chapters (Stop mode)
• Chapter number currently played
back (Playback mode)
• Chapter number currently recorded
(Recording mode)
6 Counter/Total time of the current title
7 Repeat Playback indicator
REC
LIVE
LIVE
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Press ON SCREEN (under the
cover) or DVD again.
3
Press ON SCREEN (under the
cover) or DVD again.
• Display is turned off.
NOTE
• The DVD information screen (step 1) will
automatically disappear in 1 minute.
• The counter display (step 2) will not disappear automatically. Press ON SCREEN
(under the cover) or DVD to turn it off.
• When you press DISPLAY while DV is
being input, the control panel is displayed.
(DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only)
Display Information
Switching Front Panel
Display
Turning off the LCD
Backlight
When resetting, recording programmed
broadcasts and other times when you do
not care to have the backlight on, you
can turn it off.
Front panel display
1
Press OPERATE to
turn the power on.
• Channel display (when watching TV)
• Counter display (during playback/
recording)
2
Hour
Minute Second
Press DISPLAY (under the cover).
• Remaining time display (when
watching TV)
Hour
Minute
• Current title number and chapter
number (during playback)
Current title Current chapter
• Channel currently recorded (during
recording)
3
Press DISPLAY (under the
cover) again.
• The screen returns to the display in
step 1.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
1
Press BACKLIGHT (under the
cover) for 2 seconds or more to
turn the LCD backlight on or off.
Preparation to Operate This Recorder
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
DVD VIDEO
VIDEO CD
AUDIO CD
CD-R
MP3
WMA
CD-RW
MP3
CD-RW
JPEG
JPEG
Some operations such as "OPERATE" (turn
on/stand by), "RECORD" and "PLAY"(both HDD
and DVD) can be done by buttons both on the
Remote Control and the Recorder.
=
Remote
Control
CD-R
WMA
The
Recorder
+
=
on HDD (left) side
+
=
on DVD (right) side
Remote Control
The Recorder
The same thing applies to
REC STOP and STOP buttons.
1
Turn on the power of TV.
4
Operating HDD
Press
.
• The HDD mode indicator in the front
panel display appears, and HDD
operation is enabled.
2
3
Operating DVD
Switch TV input to the AV
input used to connect to the
Recorder.
Press
.
• The DVD mode indicator in the
front panel display appears, and
DVD operation is enabled.
Recording and Playback
to turn the
Press
Recorder on.
• Refer to pages 38 to 79 for details
about recording and playback.
• TV broadcast will be displayed.
NOTE
• To operate HDD from Recorder, press the buttons on the
––HDD–– sign (left side). As for DVD, press the buttons
on the ––DVD–– sign (right side).
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
NOTE
• When you turn on power, the HDD mode indicator and
DVD mode indicator in the Front Panel Display will blink.
As the system processing is in progress during blinking,
wait until the blinking stops and the HDD mode indicator
turns on.
Time Shift Viewing/Chasing Playback
With this Recorder, you can enjoy Time Shift Viewing and Chasing Playback—distinctive features of an HDD.
1 Time Shift Viewing
2 Chasing Playback
While you are watching a programme, the phone rings.... At
times like this, you can pause the programme at the press of
a button and watch the rest later.
You return home earlier than expected while timer recording
is in progress.... At times like this, you can watch the
programme from the beginning without having to wait for the
recording to finish.
NOTE
• It may take a moment for the Time Shift viewing to begin.
• Some programmes may not allow you to time shift view
due to copyright of the programmes.
• Programmes recorded for Time Shift Viewing will be
erased automatically if Time Shift Viewing is cancelled.
Time Shift Viewing (Pause)
You can pause during sudden phone call or when you want
to take a note. In such cases press TIME SHIFT to pause.
Press | PLAY to watch the rest of the programme.
Programme starts.
Live Programme ends.
NOTE
• It may take a moment for the Chasing Playback to begin.
Chasing Playback (Pause➔Play)
Press G REV or
(SKIP) during recording or timer
recording to watch the recorded programme from the
beginning. (If there are one or more chapter markers
between the current position of recording and the start of the
chasing playback, press
(SKIP) plural times to get
back to the start.). If you press REPLAY, the programme will
return to the position 10 seconds before and start Chasing
Playback. If you press STILL/PAUSE, playback will stop
temporarily. In either case, recording continues in real time.
Actual time
(Live broadcast)
What you
watch
Live programme/
Timer recording starts.
Live Programme ends.
(Timer programme was
scheduled to end here.)
Actual time
(Live broadcast)
What you watch
The phone rings and you press TIME SHIFT.
You are talking on the phone. (Not watching TV.)
You finish the phone call and press | PLAY.
Recording and Playback are in progress simultaneously.
You come home and press G REV or K(SKIP).
You finish watching the programme.
Recording and Playback are in progress Simultaneously.
You are watching the recorded programme.
You finish watching the programme.
You are watching the recorded programme.
Press ■ STOP/LIVE to return to the current (live) broadcast.
(Time shift recording stops at this point. Recorded
programmes will be erased automatically.)
NOTE
• If the HDD becomes full while watching a video in Time
Shift, the recording for Time Shift will stop, but playback
will continue. When Time Shift viewing is stopped
(finished), the video image recorded for Time Shift viewing
is deleted.
• A message will be displayed 5 minutes before timer
recording starts. If you are time shift viewing, it will stop
and goes back to live broadcast 3 minutes later (2
minutes before timer recording starts).
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback
If you press G REV or J FWD during Time Shift
Viewing or Chasing Playback, Fast Reverse/Forward
Playback starts.
If you press G REV (or J FWD) again, the speed of
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback changes as shown below.
When you select
Fast Forward Playback (Forward only)
you can enjoy audio together with video (Rapid playback).
(Approx. 1.5x) (Approx. 8x) (Approx. 32x)
(
Fast Reverse is Approx. 2x)
NOTE
• If you perform Fast Forward Playback during Time Shift
Viewing or Chasing Playback, the Recorder will automatically switch to the playback screen when Fast Forward
Playback almost reaches the live broadcast. The timing
that goes automatically back to playback mode will
slightly differ depending on the speed of Fast Forward
and Recording Mode.
• When the unit automatically goes back to normal Playback during
, you can still view the programme in Fast
Forward Playback up to the point of the live broadcast by
performing
or
.
Time Shift Viewing/Chasing Playback
• When you select
Fast Forward
Playback (Forward only) you can
enjoy audio together with video
(Rapid playback).
• Press |PLAY to return to the normal
playback speed.
Time Shift Viewing
HDD
NOTE
• If scheduled recording of a programme
starts during Time Shift viewing, the Time
Shift viewing will stop and the broadcast
screen (live) of the channel being recorded
will appear.
• Time Shift viewing is not possible when
inputting DV. (DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only)
• There are broadcast for which Chasing
Playback viewing is not possible.
• There are also broadcast for which Time
Shift viewing is not possible due to
copyright protection.
• When playing back from the DVD drive,
Time Shift viewing is not possible.
When using a Play List (page 88), Time
Shift viewing is not possible.
1
Press TIME SHIFT while
viewing a programme.
• Pause screen will be displayed in a
few seconds.
Pause icon
(This will become a square icon during
Time Shift Viewing.)
4
• Time Shift Viewing will be cancelled,
and the automatically recorded
content will be erased.
NOTE
• If the pause state continues for approximately 15 minutes, playback is automatically resumed in order to avoid having the
image burnt into the screen.
• Time shift viewing will stop in the following
cases.
• TIME SHIFT or ■ STOP/LIVE is pressed.
• The broadcast whose recording is
prohibited is received.
Chasing Playback
HDD
1
Press | PLAY.
• Playback starts from the position you
paused.
Play icon
• Press FSTILL/PAUSE to pause
playback (Still Playback).
To cancel Still Playback, press
FSTILL/PAUSE or |PLAY.
3
2
(Approx. 1.5x) (Approx. 8x)
(
Fast Reverse is Approx. 2x)
(Approx. 32x)
Fast Reverse is Approx. 2x)
• When you select
Fast Forward
Playback (Forward only) you can
enjoy audio together with video
(Rapid playback).
• Press | PLAY to return to the normal
playback speed.
Example: When J FWD is pressed
once
Fast Forward Playback 1.5x icon
3
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
(Approx. 32x)
Example: When J FWD is pressed
once
Fast Forward Playback 1.5x icon
• Each time you press the buttons, the
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback
speed changes as shown below.
(
Press G REV or J FWD
during Chasing Playback.
• Each time you press the buttons, the
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback
speed changes as shown below.
Press G REV or J FWD
during Time Shift Viewing.
(Approx. 1.5x) (Approx. 8x)
Press G REV or K(SKIP)
during recording.
• Playback starts from the beginning of
the programme being recorded.
(Chasing Playback)
• Press FSTILL/PAUSE to pause
playback (Still Playback).
To cancel Still Playback, press
FSTILL/PAUSE or |PLAY.
• Press ■ STOP/LIVE to return to
current (live) broadcast.
2
Press ■STOP/LIVE to return to
the current (live) broadcast.
Press ■STOP/LIVE to return to
the live broadcast which is being
recorded.
Recording to HDD
This section explains recording on the
hard disc (HDD). (For information on
recording to DVD, see page 41.)
Confirming Remaining Time
for Recording
To confirm on TV screen
• Press ON SCREEN (under the cover).
To confirm on front display panel
• Press DISPLAY (under the cover).
* Information such as the remaining time on
the disc, the number of titles recorded is
displayed. Checking this information before
recording is recommended.
HDD Screen Example
This display
means that you
can record 20
hours more in XP
mode.
HD D
OR IG IN AL
X P REMAIN 20h0m
7 8
1 3
0 0 : 00 : 00
0 0 : 20 : 30
NOTE
• The disc remaining time display serves as
a rough estimation for gauging remaining
capacity. A disc may have open space
remaining when recording has been
completed. (There are cases in which the
value displayed for "REMAIN" during
recording and that displayed when
recording is stopped will not be the same.)
Guide to Recordable Length
of Time
The recording mode is a setting value for the
image quality. This Recorder provides five
types of recording modes, consisting of four
basic modes of EP, LP, SP and XP, and the
MN mode, in which finer settings can be
selected.
The higher the image quality, the shorter the
amount of recording time becomes. This is
due to the fact that the higher the quality of
the images, the larger the amount of data that
must be recorded.
Recording
mode
Quality
Recordable time
Long
Low
EP
MN1
LP
MN9
SP
MN21
XP
MN32
High
Short
Recordable Time by Recording
Mode
Recording mode
Recording time
(DV-HR480F)
Recording time
(DV-HR450F)
Recording time
(DV-HR400F)
XP
SP
LP
EP
61 hr 104 hr 208 hr 312 hr
40 hr 68 hr 137 hr 205 hr
20 hr 33 hr 67 hr 100 hr
• Remaining time for recording differs
according to the recording mode.
• Recordable time might be less than above
figures depending on the programme to be
recorded.
• MN (manual) recording mode setting
allows you to select the picture quality from
among 32 levels on the “REC MODE
SETTING” screen of “REC FUNCTION”
under “OTHER SETTINGS” (page 43).
• For details about recording time, see page
43.
Dubbing (Page 58)
• Titles recorded on HDD can be saved by
dubbing them to DVD-RW/R. (You can also
dub from DVD-RW/R to HDD.)
• You can batch dub up to 10 programmes.
• EXACT DUBBING: When dubbing a title
recorded on HDD to DVD, this function
automatically selects the recording mode
based on the amount of remaining time on
the disc, so that the title can be recorded
onto one disc.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Recording to HDD
High-Speed Dubbing Priority
(Page 59)
• This Recorder has a high-speed dubbing
function. The High-Speed Dubbing Priority
function can be used when dubbing from
HDD to video format DVD.
• This setting must be specified in advance
when performing high-speed dubbing from
HDD to an DVD-R or video format DVD-RW
disc.
• If you set high-speed dubbing priority,
there will be restrictions, such as the
inability to edit at the frame level, when you
edit the video.
* When performing high-speed dubbing to a
VR format DVD-RW disc, this setting is not
necessary.
Chasing Playback (Page 37)
• This lets you playback and watch a
programme from the beginning while it is
being recorded on HDD.
Simultaneous Recording/
Playback (Page 79)
• This lets you playback and watch a
programme recorded on HDD, or a DVD or
CD, while recording another programme on
HDD.
• You can use the HDD playback function
even while you record another broadcast to
DVD or a programmed recording to DVD is
performed.
HDD
Explained below is the standard procedure
for recording the programme being viewed
onto HDD.
• A maximum of 12 hours can be recorded
onto HDD in one direct recording session.
• A maximum of 199 programmes can be
recorded (saved) onto HDD.
NOTE
• The content being recorded will not be
successfully recorded if power failure
occurs or if power cord is accidentally
unplugged.
* Also direct recording to a DVD-RW/R is
possible. (Page 41)
• Video for which recording is prohibited
cannot be recorded.
Preparation for Direct Recording
• Perform “CLOCK SETTING” and
“CHANNEL SETTING”. (Pages 29-31)
• When you record NICAM broadcast, set
“NICAM” setting to “AUTO”. (Page 108)
• When recording to the HDD, the recorded
data is the same as that recorded to a
DVD-RW in VR mode.
• After recording a programme on your HDD,
when you want to dub (copy) it to a video
format DVD-RW/R without degrading the
image quality, set the “HI SP DUB SETTING” to “YES”. (Pages 59, 104)
Cutting out Commercials
(Pages 83, 92)
1
• After recording is finished, you can cut out
commercials and other unnecessary
scenes by calling up the “ERASE SCENE”
function.
(Commercials cannot be cut out automatically during recording.)
• With video recorded to a video format DVDRW/R, it is not possible to erase scenes.
2
Press the Number buttons or
CH' / " to select the channel to
be recorded.
3
Press REC MODE to select the
recording mode.
Tamper Proof
• You can set Tamper Proof to prevent
operations by mistake during recording or
timer recording.
1 Press and hold TAMPER PROOF (RGB
OFF and ON SCREEN together) for
more than 2 seconds.
2 Each time you perform this operation,
the function is activated or deactivated.
• If you try to operate the Recorder while
Tamper Proof is set, “
” blinks in the front
display panel and tells you that Tamper
Proof is set.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Direct Recording to HDD
Press HDD to select HDD mode.
• The HDD mode indicator in the front
panel display appears.
• HDD mode is selected automatically
when the power is turned on.
• The recording mode changes as
shown below each time the button is
pressed.
XP
SP
LP
EP
MNgg
• Recording mode set by selecting
“MNgg” is the recording mode set
on the “REC MODE SETTING” screen
(page 44).
Recording to HDD
4
Press Æ REC during broadcast
viewing.
• To perform recording by operating the
controls on the Recorder, press the
Æ REC button on the HDD side (left).
• Recording begins and REC icon is
displayed in TV screen.
• Æ REC on the HDD (left) side of the
Recorder is lit during recording.
REC icon
REC
5
Press REC PAUSE to pause
recording.
• Record Pause does not work during
Chasing Playback.
• During pause, Æ REC on the HDD
(left) side of the Recorder blinks.
REC PAUSE icon
6
Press REC PAUSE to resume
recording.
7
Press REC STOP to stop recording.
Press CHAPTER MARK.
• “RECORDED CHAPTER MARKER. ” is
displayed and chapter marker will be
inserted.
• You cannot insert chapter markers during
Simultaneous Recording/Playback.
• It is not possible to add chapter markers
during recording with DVD-R and video
format DVD-RW discs.
Setting the Record End
Time during Direct
Recording (Simple
Recording Timer)
HDD
1
Press Æ REC during recording.
SET REC STOP TIME.
STOP TIME
SET REC STOP TIME
• To stop by operating the controls on
the Recorder, press the REC STOP
button on the HDD side (left).
NOTE
• Data is still written to the disc after recording
is stopped, and so you may be unable to
start the next recording immediately.
• You cannot record programmes whose
recording is prohibited.
• Timer recording cannot be performed
during direct recording. To perform timer
recording, stop direct recording before the
preset time for timer recording.
• When playback of another programme in
HDD or DVD/CD has started, recording to
HDD will continue.
• You cannot start recording of a programme,
during playback of HDD or DVD/CD.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Inserting Chapter Markers
Manually during Recording
10 : 30
ENTER
ENTER
• The “SET REC STOP TIME” screen is
displayed.
2
Press ' / " to set the end time.
• The end time can be set in units of 15
minutes.
• Total recording time cannot exceed
12 hours so the end time has to be
set accordingly.
• Press EXIT to abort setting.
3
Press SET/ENTER.
• The record end time is set, and the
Simple Recording Timer indicator
(clock mark) lights up on the front
display panel.
Recording to DVD
This section explains recording on the
DVD (For information on recording to
HDD, see page 38.)
Checking Remaining Time
and Other Information
Press ON SCREEN (under the cover) during
DVD playback or recording.
• Disc capacity and the number of recorded
titles, etc. are displayed. It is recommended to confirm before recording.
DVD-RW
VR OR I G IN AL
X P REMAIN 0h30m
2 5
3 8
00 : 00 : 00
00 : 20 : 30
Disc capacity
Number of titles
Number of
chapters
• “REMAIN 0h0m” or nothing will be displayed when an unrecordable disc is set.
NOTE
• Disc remaining time display is approximate
measure of disc capacity. There may be
space left in disc capacity after recording.
(Remaining time during recording and after
recording might not match exactly.)
Tamper Proof
• You can set Tamper Proof to prevent
operations by mistake during recording or
timer recording.
1 Press and hold TAMPER PROOF (RGB
OFF and ON SCREEN together) for
more than 2 seconds.
2 Each time you perform this operation,
the function is activated or deactivated.
• If you try to operate the Recorder while
Tamper Proof is set, “
” blinks in the front
display panel and tells you that Tamper
Proof is set.
Loading Disc
1
Press OPERATE to turn the
power on.
2
Press OPEN/CLOSE on the
Recorder to open the disc tray.
OPEN/CLOSE
3
Load disc on the disc tray.
Simultaneous Recording/
Playback (page 79)
• HDD playback is possible while recording
or timer recording to DVD.
Dubbing (page 58)
• Dubbing titles recorded on DVD to HDD or
titles recorded on HDD to DVD-RW/R are
possible.
• Exact Dubbing: Automatically selects the
appropriate recording mode according to
the remaining capacity of DVD when
dubbing titles recorded on HDD to DVD.
Not Enough Disc Capacity
• Exact Recording (page 105)
Exact recording functions when the
selected recording mode is not appropriate
to fit the programme to the disc when you
timer record.
• Alternative Recording (page 105)
Alternative recording functions when you
forget to load a DVD for timer recording. It
automatically timer records the programme
to HDD.
Cutting TV Commercials
(page 83)
• You can cut unwanted scenes like TV
commercials by using the ERASE SCENE
function after the recording. (Cannot cut TV
commercials automatically.)
• You cannot cut scenes when you record
programmes by Video mode to DVD-RW or
DVD-R.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
• Insert the disc with the label face up.
• In case of disc recorded on both
sides, face down the side to record.
4
Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the
disc tray.
Direct Recording to DVD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
Explained below is the standard procedure
for recording the programme being viewed
onto DVD.
• You can create a maximum of 99 original
titles.
• Record in VR mode when you want to edit
later. Edit functions will be limited when you
record in Video mode.
Preparation for Direct Recording
• When you record NICAM broadcast, set
“NICAM” setting to “AUTO” (see page 108).
1
Press DVD to select DVD mode.
• The DVD mode indicator in the front
panel display appears.
• When the power is turned on, HDD
mode is selected automatically.
Recording to DVD
2
Set a DVD-RW or DVD-R disc.
• When a new DVD-RW disc not
initialised yet is set, VR mode
initialising starts automatically. When
initialising is over, you can start
recording.
• When you want to re-initialise in Video
mode, select “DVD INITIALISE
(VIDEO)” screen (page 96).
• When you want to initialise in Video
mode from the beginning, select
“DVD AUTO INITIALISE” screen
(page 105).
3
Press Number buttons or CH ' /
" to select the channel to record.
4
Press REC MODE to select the
desired recording mode.
• The recording mode changes as
shown below each time the button is
pressed.
XP
SP
LP
EP
MNgg
• Recording mode set when “MNgg”
is selected is the recording mode set
on the “REC MODE SETTING” screen
(page 44).
5
Press Æ REC.
• Recording begins and REC icon is
displayed.
• To perform recording by operating the
controls on the Recorder, press the
Æ REC button on the DVD side (right).
• Æ REC on the DVD (right) side of the
Recorder is lit during recording.
REC
6
Press REC PAUSE to pause
recording.
NOTE
• Data is still written to the disc after recording
is stopped, and so you may be unable to
start the next recording immediately.
• Press ON SCREEN (under the cover) to
confirm remaining time of DVD or check
the counter display during recording.
• You cannot record programmes which
prohibit recording.
• Recording either stops or pauses automatically in the following cases.
—Programme which prohibits recording is
on air.
—Unable to continue recording for some
reason.
• Timer recording cannot be performed
during direct recording. To perform timer
recording, stop direct recording before the
preset time for timer recording.
• Digital broadcast can only be recorded in
VR format to DVD-RW disc (CPRM
enabled).
You may not be able to record on disc
edited by other recorder.
• If a disc edited by other DVD recorder has
more than 999 chapter markers, it cannot
be edited (or recorded) with this Recorder.
• If a disc edited by other DVD recorder has
added or erased scenes 51 times or more
per title or the disc is protected, it cannot
be edited (or recorded) with this Recorder.
About Recording to DVD in Video Mode
• In case you are recording to DVD in Video
mode and recording stops due to power
failure etc., recorded contents a few
minutes before the stop may not be
recorded.
• To record bilingual broadcast in Video
format, you should select which audio
channel to record out of L CH and R CH
(“BILINGUAL SETTING”, Page 104.)
• For details on limitation during recording
(dubbing) in Video mode, see also pages
59, 60.
Inserting Chapter Markers
Manually during Recording
• Pause will not function during timer
recording.
• Æ REC on the DVD (right) side of the
Recorder blinks during Recording
Pause mode.
7
Press REC PAUSE to resume
recording.
8
Press REC STOP to stop
recording.
• To stop recording by operating the
controls on the Recorder, press the
REC STOP button on the DVD side
(right).
• “RECORDING DATA TO DISC.” is
displayed on TV screen and recording stops.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
• Stop recording before you take out
the disc.
Press CHAPTER MARK.
• “RECORDED CHAPTER MARKER.” is
displayed and chapter marker is recorded.
• You can only record chapter markers
manually when recording to DVD-RW (VR
mode).
• You cannot record chapter markers
manually when recording to DVD-RW
(Video mode) or DVD-R, or during Simultaneous Recording/Playback.
Setting Record End Time
during Direct Recording
• You can set record end time during direct
recording to DVD. For details see “Setting
the Record End Time during Direct
Recording (Simple Recording Timer)” on
page 40.
Setting Recording Mode (HDD/DVD)
• HDD recording time is approximate measure. DVD recording time is approximate measure using 4.7GB disc.
• This does not guarantee the length of recording time. Actual recording time may be shorter than indicated below depending on
image quality and other aspects. The HDD Remaining Time displayed on the TV screen indicates rough estimation of the shortest
remaining recordable time.
HDD Recording Mode and
Recording Time
DVD-RW/R Recording Mode
and Recording Time
HDD
EP
LP
SP
XP
Recording
Mode
MN1
MN2
MN3
MN4
MN5
MN6
MN7
MN8
MN9
MN10
MN11
MN12
MN13
MN14
MN15
MN16
MN17
MN18
MN19
MN20
MN21
MN22
MN23
MN24
MN25
MN26
MN27
MN28
MN29
MN30
MN31
MN32
DV-HR480F
DV-HR450F
DV-HR400F
Recording
Time (approx.)
312 Hr
300 Hr
286 Hr
273 Hr
260 Hr
248 Hr
234 Hr
221 Hr
208 Hr
199 Hr
191 Hr
182 Hr
174 Hr
165 Hr
156 Hr
147 Hr
139 Hr
130 Hr
121 Hr
113 Hr
104 Hr
100 Hr
95 Hr
91 Hr
87 Hr
82 Hr
78 Hr
74 Hr
71 Hr
68 Hr
64 Hr
61 Hr
Recording
Time (approx.)
205 Hr
197 Hr
188 Hr
179 Hr
170 Hr
163 Hr
153 Hr
145 Hr
137 Hr
131 Hr
125 Hr
120 Hr
114 Hr
108 Hr
102 Hr
97 Hr
91 Hr
85 Hr
80 Hr
74 Hr
68 Hr
65 Hr
63 Hr
60 Hr
57 Hr
54 Hr
51 Hr
48 Hr
47 Hr
45 Hr
43 Hr
40 Hr
Recording
Time (approx.)
100 Hr
96 Hr
91 Hr
87 Hr
83 Hr
79 Hr
75 Hr
71 Hr
67 Hr
64 Hr
61 Hr
58 Hr
55 Hr
53 Hr
50 Hr
47 Hr
44 Hr
42 Hr
39 Hr
36 Hr
33 Hr
32 Hr
30 Hr
29 Hr
28 Hr
26 Hr
25 Hr
24 Hr
23 Hr
22 Hr
21 Hr
20 Hr
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
Recording Recording
Mode Time (approx.)
MN1
360 Min
MN2
345 Min
MN3
330 Min
MN4
315 Min
MN5
300 Min
MN6
285 Min
MN7
270 Min
MN8
255 Min
MN9
240 Min
MN10 230 Min
MN11 220 Min
MN12 210 Min
MN13 200 Min
MN14 190 Min
MN15 180 Min
MN16 170 Min
MN17 160 Min
MN18 150 Min
MN19 140 Min
MN20 130 Min
MN21 120 Min
MN22 110 Min
MN23 105 Min
MN24 100 Min
MN25
95 Min
MN26
90 Min
MN27
85 Min
MN28
80 Min
MN29
75 Min
MN30
70 Min
MN31
65 Min
MN32
60 Min
EP
LP
SP
XP
DVD-R
Recording Recording
Mode Time (approx.)
MN1
360 Min
MN2
345 Min
MN3
330 Min
MN4
315 Min
MN5
300 Min
MN6
285 Min
MN7
270 Min
MN8
255 Min
MN9
240 Min
MN10 230 Min
MN11 220 Min
MN12 210 Min
MN13 200 Min
MN14 190 Min
MN15 180 Min
MN16 170 Min
MN17 160 Min
MN18 150 Min
MN19 140 Min
MN20 130 Min
MN21 120 Min
MN22 110 Min
MN23 105 Min
MN24 100 Min
MN25
95 Min
MN26
90 Min
MN27
85 Min
MN28
80 Min
MN29
75 Min
MN30
70 Min
MN31
65 Min
MN32
60 Min
Important!
When you want to playback a video format DVD-R recorded on this Recorder on a DVD player:
• When you want to playback a disc recorded in manual recording mode on this Recorder on a DVD player, playback may
not be performed correctly (only a specific mode cannot be playback), depending on the type of DVD player.
NOTE
• Higher recording mode means higher picture quality and lower recording mode means longer recording time.
• Picture quality of recorded content changes distinctively if the recording mode changes from the recording modes right
below the bold lines in the above chart and recording modes right above the bold lines. The positions of the bold lines
differ among HDD, DVD-RW (VR Mode) and DVD-RW/R (Video Mode).
• With MN22-32, VBR recording has a large effect, so the actual recording time will be longer.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Setting Recording Mode (HDD/DVD)
Setting the Manual
Recording Mode (MN)
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
You can set the manual recording mode
which is used when you select “MNgg” with
REC MODE.
Direct Recording the TV
programme you are
watching
HDD
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
Important!
• This function is available only when
connecting to your TV that has AV Link
function, using SCART cable.
• This may not function properly with some
equipments.
• Refer to operation manual of each external
equipment for the details.
1
Press START MENU to display
the “START MENU” screen.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(“OTHER SETTINGS”), then press
SET/ENTER.
3
Press \ / | to select “REC FUNCTION”.
You can record the TV programme you are
watching with easy operation.
4
Press ' / " to select “REC MODE
SETTING”, then press SET/
ENTER.
1
Press DVD or HDD to select the
recording disc.
2
Press DIRECT REC TV (under
the cover) to start recording.
3
Press REC STOP to stop recording.
OTHER SETTINGS [REC. FUNCTION: REC MODE SETTING] 24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
REC FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SET
ADJUSTMENT
CONTROL SET
REC MODE SETTING
AUDIO REC TYPE SET
EXTERNAL IN AUDIO
BILINGUAL SETTING
AUTO CHAPTER SETTING
HI SP DUB SETTING
ALTERNATIVE REC SET
DVD AUTO INITIALISE
EXACT REC. SETTING
SELECT
5
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
Press \ / | to select the desired
recording mode, then press SET/
ENTER.
• Refer to the table on page 43.
OTHER SETTINGS [REC. FUNCTION: REC.MODE SETTING] 24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
SELECT THE PICTURE QUALITY FROM 32 LEVELS FOR MANUAL REC MODE.
(THIS IS THE PICTURE QUALITY SETTING USED WHEN THE REC MODE MN
IS SELECTED FOR HARD DISC RECORDING OR DVD RECORDING.)
EP
LP
SP
CURRENT MODE : MN 21
XP
( : 3 Mbps )
REMAINING TIME : HDD
107h39m
DVD
1h50m
NOTE
When playing back a DVD-RW/R disc
(Video Mode) recorded with the Recorder
using a DVD player.
• When you playback a disc recorded with
the manual mode of the Recorder using a
DVD player, it may not be able to playback
depending on the model (some particular
modes cannot be played back).
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
DVD-RW
Timer Recording/The GUIDE Plus+® System
NOTE
About the language and country in the
GUIDE Plus+ system
• In the GUIDE Plus+ system, there are six
languages available for the screen
message language as follows: French,
German, English, Italian, Spanish and
Dutch.
• In some countries or areas, where there are
no Host Channels or data from Host
Channels cannot be received, some features
of the GUIDE Plus+ system such as TV
listings data and One-Button Recording are
not available. But in such areas as well, other
features do work such as Manual Recording
(Page 53). For the table of Host Channels,
see page 47.
The GUIDE Plus+ System
Overview
The GUIDE Plus+® system is an interactive
on-screen television programming guide
integrated into the Recorder. The system is
available at no monthly charge and offers
programme listings for all major channels
received in your home, one-touch recording,
search by genre, recommendations according to your profile and more.
You can start the GUIDE Plus+ system by
pressing GUIDE at anytime except during
playback and editing.
In this new era of ever-increasing number of
channels, the GUIDE Plus+ system offers
television viewers a convenient way to find
out what’s on right now or in the next week, by
channel or by genre. The GUIDE Plus+
system also allows viewers to automatically
set their viewing and recording selections
quickly and easily. The TV listings information
displayed in the GUIDE Plus+ system is
obtained directly from sources in the broadcasting industry. This information is received
and processed by Gemstar-TV Guide and
“broadcasted” via so called “Host Channels”
directly to your Recorder equipped with the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
In order to receive the correct TV listings
information for your country / region you need
to “setup” your GUIDE Plus+ system and
“download” TV listings information. The initial
download may take up to 24 hours. Once you
have received the first download of TV listings
data, all future updates are automatic.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home Screen”
displaying the Grid:
P 00 1-Sep 17:21
Video
Window
Record
Channels
France 2 [P 02]
17:10 ( 40Min)
i
My TV
Grid
Search
Schedule
Wed,1
17:00
17:30
Chaîns
The
Agents
Show
Avec… Neighbours
Voyage : Les Patrimoines…
précédents Talk
TF1
The Agents
Météo
Action Bar
Information
Box
Menu
Bar
Grid
Neighbours
\Informations
The
Agents
Weakest
LinkPatrimoines…
Show
Avec… Voyage
: Les
France 2 Talk
Heartbeat
de Foot|
France 3 Championnat
Heartbeat
Nature Merveilleuse (2) La Forêt Pluviale...
Canal t La
fiveJardin|
News
France 5 Le Magazine TV de ... Le
Information Panels
Each part of the display screen (except some setup screens)
functions as follows:
Grid:
Displays TV listings information by channel
and time, seven days in advance.
Menu Bar:
Accesses to the different Areas of the GUIDE
Plus+ system.
Information Box: Displays short programme descriptions or
help menus.
Action Bar:
The four coloured Action buttons change
functionality depending on the Area.
Video Window:
You can continue to watch the current
programme while consulting the GUIDE Plus+
system.
Information Panels: Display programme promotions or instructions on the GUIDE Plus+ system.
NOTE
Operating the power source while TV
listings data is being downloaded
• Even when the power is off, during
download of TV listings data, the internal
state of the power source is on. When you
want to use the Recorder while TV listings
data is being downloaded, press OPERATE to cause the STANDBY indicator of the
Recorder to be lit red. (It may take 1-2
minutes for the STANDBY indicator to be lit
red.) After the STANDBY indicator is lit red,
press OPERATE once more. (The download of TV listings data will be suspended.)
• When TV listings data is being downloaded,
the Front Panel Display appears as follows:
For more information, see the GUIDE Plus+
website: www.europe.guideplus.com
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Home
Voyage: Les Patrimoines Mondiaux: Présente les patrimoines
naturels et culturels du monde.
Highlight
Timer Recording/The GUIDE Plus+® System
The GUIDE Plus+ Setup
4
Preparation before the
GUIDE Plus+ setup
• Complete the connection of your equipment (the Recorder, TV, aerial, external
tuner if applicable). See page 23 for basic
connection. Please note that if you use an
external receiver (such as Satellite tuner),
you have to connect the plug of G-LINK
cable to the back of the Recorder and
place the other end in front of the tuner.
This will allow you to control the tuner of the
receiver through the GUIDE Plus+ system.
• Complete the setup of the Recorder. For
the GUIDE Plus+ system it is necessary
that you have selected the display
language and country. Both values will be
transferred to the GUIDE Plus+ setup
screen. Also it is important that “AUTO
INSTALLATION” has been done to install all
available channels.
Without External Receiver
If you receive all your TV channel through a
standard (analogue) terrestrial aerial or
through cable without using an external
receiver, follow the procedure below.
1
Press GUIDE to display the
GUIDE Plus+ setup menu screen.
• Confirm the settings for “Language”
and “Country” and edit them if
necessary.
2
3
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Press ' / " to select “Postal
Code”. Press SET/ENTER, then
press ' / " / \ / | to enter your
postal code. Leave the “External
Receiver” fields as is (to “None”).
Then press GUIDE to exit the
setup menu.
Leave the Recorder in “STANDBY”
overnight to receive the TV
listings data.
• The GUIDE Plus+ system is automatically “scanning” during a pre-defined
timeslot all your channels to identify
the correct host channel. Depending
on your region this may take up to 24
hours, because in some areas data is
only available during certain
timeslots.
• All other actions like “recording” or
“watching” have priority over the
“scanning (automatic receiving of
data)”. Therefore it is important to
leave the Recorder in standby (not
“ON”).
• All future downloads will happen
automatically.
On the next day, press GUIDE to
confirm that your first data
download has been completed.
When you are done, press Blue
(D) (Home) to start using the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
• If certain channels are missing, or if
you see channels that you don’t
receive, press ' / | a few times to
display the “Editor” screen. Then
' / " to select a channel to
press'
edit, and turn “ON” or “OFF” the
channels according to what you
receive in your home.
NOTE
• Make sure that the setting for your Host
Channel is always “On”, and the correct
source (the internal tuner of the Recorder
or an external tuner such as CATV top box
or Terrestrial Digital tuner) and programme
number are displayed on the “Editor”
screen (Page 56). Otherwise you will not be
able to receive data.
With External Receiver
If you have a digital terrestrial tuner, a
cable box (analogue or digital) or satellite
receiver (analogue or digital) in your home,
follow the procedure below.
1
Make sure that you have connected the plug of the G-LINK
cable to the Recorder and place
the other end in front of the
external receiver through the
GUIDE Plus+ system (Page 23).
• This will allow you to control the tuner
of the receiver through the GUIDE
Plus+ system.
NOTE
• The G-LINK transmitter must be connected
and placed in front of your external receiver
so that its infrared detector can receive a
clear signal. To find the infrared detector in
your receiver you can either use its remote
control and move it slowly from left to right
in front of it while pressing any channel
button. If you can see a red blinking light or
the receiver switched to the respective
channel you have located the infrared
detector. Or you use a flash light and look
behind the glass screen of the box. The
infrared detector looks like a small red light
bulb.
Timer Recording/The GUIDE Plus+® System
2
Press GUIDE to display the
GUIDE Plus+ setup menu screen.
• Confirm the settings for “Language”
and “Country” and edit them if
necessary.
3
Press ' / " to select “Postal
Code”. Press SET/ENTER, then
press ' / " / \ / | to enter your
postal code. Then, using ' / " ,
select “External Receiver 1” and set
the details. Select (1) your reception (terrestrial, cable or satellite),
(2) your provider, (3) the brand of
your external receiver and (4) the
terminal which your external
receiver is plugged into (SCART 2).
• The Recorder will now try to communicate with your external receiver via
the G-LINK cable. The display
message will ask you if the receiver
has changed to a specified channel.
4
If the external tuner changed
channels correctly, press ' / " to
select “YES” and press SET/
ENTER. Then press GUIDE to
exit the setup menu.
• If the external receiver did NOT
change channels, or if your receiver
brand is not included in the on-screen
list, go to Alternate Setup (See page
48).
5
Tune your external receiver
manually to your Host Channel.
Leave your external receiver “ON”
overnight and leave the Recorder
in “STANDBY” overnight to scan
and receive the TV listings data.
• See the following table for Host
Channels in your country. The table
may be updated from time to time.
For updates, see the GUIDE Plus+
website: www.europe.guideplus.com
• If your external receiver is “OFF”
when you try to receive data the
GUIDE Plus+ system cannot receive
any data.
• All other actions than the “scanning
(automatic receiving of data)”, such
as “recording” or “watching” have
priority over the “scanning”, and will
prevent it.
• All future downloads will happen
automatically.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Host Channels in France
Canal+
(Analogue only)
NOTE
• Even if you live in a country where there is
a Host Channel, if you cannot be receive
data from any Host Channel, change the
setting of your country to “Other.” Scanning
of the Host Channel will not be started.
• If the Recorder programme number in the
Editor screen and that of the external
receiver are unmatched after the first TV
listings data download, please change the
unmatched programme number on the
Editor screen manually to match it with that
of the external receiver. Otherwise the
Recorder will not tune to the correct
programme number for the next TV listings
data download.
6
On the next day, press GUIDE to
confirm that your first data
download has been completed.
• If certain channels are missing, or if
you see channels that you do not
receive, press ' / | a few times to
display the “Editor” screen. Then
press ' / " to select a channel to
edit, and turn “ON” or “OFF” the
channels according to what you
receive in your home.
Timer Recording/The GUIDE Plus+® System
Alternate Setup
If your external receiver is not in the list or
your external receiver could not be controlled
properly by the Recorder, please try the
following:
1. At Step 3 of page 47, select “None” (at the
end of the list) for External Receiver Brand.
2. Press GUIDE to exit the Setup menu.
3. Tune your external receiver to your “Host
Channel” (see list of Host Channels in Step
5) and leave it “ON” overnight (the
Recorder must be on “STANDBY” overnight).
4. The next day, go back into the GUIDE
Plus+ setup menu to repeat the installation
of your external receiver (the “Language”,
“Country” and “Postal Code” entries should
be the same as you previously entered). If
the external receiver is still not in the list or
is not controlled properly by the Recorder,
please call Customer Support to report the
brand and model of your external receiver.
NOTE
• Make sure that your Host Channel is always
turned ON and the correct source and
programme number is displayed in the
“Editor” screen. Otherwise you will not be
able to receive data.
• When a timer recording is scheduled
during the download time of the TV listings
data, the data may not be downloaded
successfully. Especially between 3:00 AM
and 5:00 AM is the time slot for
downloading the data. So, it is
recommended that you do not set a timer
recording which overlaps with the above
time slot.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Exception: Two Different Sources
In some rare exceptions it might be best to
connect your equipment to two different
sources. For example you might want to use a
digital satellite or cable receiver for some
channels and an analogue terrestrial aerial for
other channels. Depending on your region it
might be necessary to identify your “Host
Channel” accordingly (see as well Step 4 and
Step 5).
1
Connect your equipment according to the chart in page 23.
• If you only have one wall outlet you
can either use a “splitter” or connect
your Recorder to the wall outlet and
your external receiver to the ANTENNA OUT jack of your Recorder.
There is a “loop through” between
ANTENNA IN and OUT and therefore
delivers the same result as a splitter.
2
For the setup procedure, we
recommend that you first follow
the procedure for “Without
External Receiver”. (Page 46) If
you are not able to receive data
you can tune manually to your
host channel as described under
“With External Receiver”. (Page
46)
NOTE
• If you use two different sources (e.g. an
analogue terrestrial aerial and an external
receiver) it is possible that the GUIDE
Plus+ system is identifying the same
channel twice or two different host
channels. We recommend that you select
the host channel that is available through
the internal tuner.
Timer Recording/The GUIDE Plus+® System
The “One-Button-Record”
Feature
This is the most convenient feature for Timer
Recording that the GUIDE Plus+ System
accommodates. The One-Button Record
feature is available anytime you can highlight
a programme tile. This can be in the Grid,
after a search for a certain category or in your
recommendations under My TV.
• If you turn off the Timer Standby mode
during timer recording, the timer recording
is switched to a normal recording which will
not stop at the timer recording end time. To
stop the recording, press REC STOP.
The operation method is the same for both
HDD and DVD.
• You can timer record up to 16 programmes
scheduled within a month, including
SHOWVIEW system and manual recording.
• You can consecutively record up to 12
hours to HDD.
• Recording set with the One-Button-Record
feature is set with the following default
parameters:
Preparation for Timer Recording
• Check that the clock is displaying the
correct time.
• If the TIMER indicator on the front of the
Recorder is lit, press TIMER ON/OFF to
turn off the TIMER indicator and to set the
Timer Standby mode to off.
• The programmes you have designated for
recording can be reviewed and edited in
the “Schedule” Area.
1
Press GUIDE to display the
GUIDE Plus+ screen.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select a
programme tile in the grid.
3
Press Red (A) to set a Timer
Recording for the programme.
Press TIMER ON/OFF to place
the Recorder in Timer Standby
mode.
• At the right time, the Recorder will
tune to the correct channel and
record the selected programme.
P 00 1-Sep 17:21
Record
Channels
Home
Voyage: Les Patrimoines Mondiaux: Présente les patrimoines
naturels et culturels du monde.
17:20 ( 40Min)
i
France 2 [P 02]
Grid
Search
Schedule
My TV
Wed,1
17:00
17:30
Chaîns
Voyage : Les Patrimoines…
précédents Talk Show Avec… Neighbours
TF1
Météo
Neighbours
\Informations
Weakest: Les
LinkPatrimoines…
France 2 Talk Show Avec… Voyage
France 3 Championnat de Foot|
Canal t La Nature Merveilleuse (2) La Forêt Pluviale...
News
Le Jardin|
France 5 Le Magazine TV de ... five
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
NOTE
• During the Timer Standby mode, you
cannot edit or add a timer programme. To
edit or add a timer programme, cancel
Timer Standby mode first.
Date / Name of the Programme / Channel /
Start Time / Duration / Mode (Rec Mode) =
SP / Frequency = once / Extra time at the
end = none (+0) / Destination = HDD
Operating the power source while TV
listings data is being downloaded
• Even when the power is off, during
download of TV listings data, the internal
state of the power source is on. When you
want to use the Recorder while TV listings
data is being downloaded, press OPERATE to cause the STANDBY indicator of the
Recorder to be lit red. (It may take 1-2
minutes for the STANDBY indicator to be lit
red.) After the STANDBY indicator is lit red,
press OPERATE but once more. (The
download of TV listings data will be
suspended.)
Timer Recording/The GUIDE Plus+® System
Browse, Search, etc...
Browse the Grid
The Grid screen is the main TV listings screen
of the GUIDE Plus+ system. It provides you
with seven days of TV listings information
starting with the current day and time and the
top channel.
The Search Area allows you to locate
programme listings by category (e.g. Movies,
Sport, etc.), subcategory (e.g. Action,
Comedy) or via personal keywords (My
Choice). The Search Area enables you to
quickly and easily find something of interest
to watch, record or to set a reminder.
1
Press GUIDE to display the
GUIDE Plus+ Screen.
1
Press GUIDE to display the
GUIDE Plus+ screen.
2
Press ' / " to move through the
Grid.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to Access the
“Search” Area through the Menu
Bar.
3
Press ' / " / \ / | to highlight the
title of the sub-category that you
are interested in.
• You can go one page up with PAGE
UP+ (one page down with PAGE
DOWN-).
• You can always return to the current
time in the Grid by pressing Blue (D)
(Home).
• You can go directly to the next day by
pressing DAY+ (one day back with
DAY-).
Within the Grid Area you can:
• View and Scroll through TV programme
' / " / \ / |).
listings (press'
• Read programme synopsis (Press ' / " /
\ / | to select a programme. For longer
synopsis press i (Information)*.
• Tune directly to a programme currently
airing (press ' / " / \ / | to select a
programme, then SET/ENTER).
• Set a programme to record (press ' / " /
\ / | to select a programme, then Red
(A)).
• Lock and unlock the Video Window (press
' / " / \ / | to select the programme to
lock/unlock then Red (A)).
• Access Information Panels (press ' / " /
\ / | to select a panel, then highlighted
Information Panel is displayed automatically).
NOTE
• If an external receiver is used, a short
delay of approximately two seconds from
the time a line is highlighted, to the time the
box tunes, is normal.
• The i (information) button is used to display
additional information of the selected
programme on screen. The i icon appears
on screen when this feature is applicable.
• The Grid screen also contains the Information Box. If your highlight is on a
programme title the Information Box is
containing the following information:
Title / Synopsis / Station / Source / Time /
Length
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Search
P 00 1-Sep 16:41
Home
'Search' displays programme listings sorted by
category. Press " to use. Press \ to view 'Grid'.
Press | to view 'My TV'.
Grid
My Choice
Search
My TV
Movies
Schedule
Sport
All
Action
Animation
Comedy
Drama
Romance
Sci Fi
Thriller
4
Press SET/ENTER to start the
search.
• All programmes in this sub-category
are displayed by date and time.
• The “Search” Area includes the
following categories.
Movies (purple) / Sport (green) /
Children (blue) / Others (teal) / My
Choice (teal)
• If you do not receive any results, this
means that for the current day no
programmes are in the database
matching your search.
• If you search for “All” in a category,
you will receive results for all subcategories in this category.
• You can also search by your own
keyword (My Choice). To do so, press
\ to access the “My Choice”
category, then press Yellow (C) to
enter your keyword.
NOTE
• There are other features such as “Rating”
(rating of programmes provided by local
partners such as TV magazines) and “Tip
of the Day” (recommendation of
programmes provided by local partners).
These features may not be available in your
area.
Timer Recording/The GUIDE Plus+® System
My TV
The “My TV” Area allows you to set up a
personal profile. You can define a profile by
channels, themes and / or by keywords. As
soon as a personal profile has been set, the
GUIDE Plus+ system is scanning automatically
and continuously the TV listings data for the
next seven days. Every time you are accessing the “My TV” Area, a list of programmes is
displayed according to your profile. The “My
TV” Area is making recommendations to you to
quickly and easily find something of interest to
watch or record.
5
Press ' / " / \ / | to move the
highlight to the word
“Categories”. Press Yellow (C) if
you want to add a category. Press
' / " / \ / | to select a category
from the “Search” Area categories
and press SET/ENTER to
confirm.
6
Press ' / " / \ / | to move the
highlight to the word “Keywords”.
Press Yellow (C) if you want to add
a keyword. Press ' / " / \ / | to
highlight a character and press
SET/ENTER to enter it. To save the
entries and finish, press Green (B).
You can define a personal profile by any
combination of:
• 16 Channels • 4 Categories • 16 Keywords
1
2
P 00 1-Sep 16:44
Press ' / " to access the “My
TV” Area through the Menu Bar.
A
G
M
S
Y
"
• The word “Channels” is highlighted.
Add
B
H
N
T
Z
'
C
I
O
U
.
D
J
P
V
:
E
K
Q
W
,
F
L
R
X
;
CLR
1
4
7
0
*
%
2
5
8
+
/
<
3
6
9
=
>
• The steps 4-6 can be repeated to add
plural channels/categories/keywords.
• To use special characters, press
Yellow (C).
Profile Settings:
TF1
Home
Home
Use this screen to enter channels, categories and
keywords for your profile. Press ' or " to select,
then press the yellow button to define your profile
settings.
Channels
Keyboard
Save
____________________
____________
Press Yellow (C) to set a Profile.
P 00 1-Sep 16:44
Back
Press |, \, ", or ' to highlight a character on
the keyboard, then press ENTER to select. Press
the yellow button to see special characters. Press
the green button to save.
Please enter a keyword:
]
3
Press GUIDE to display the
GUIDE Plus+ screen.
France 3
Categories
Keywords
Press ENTER to activate your Profile.
4
Press Yellow (C) if you want to
“Add” a channel. Press ' / " / \ /
| to select a channel from the
Channel (Mosaic) screen, then
press SET/ENTER to confirm.
• Channel (Mosaic) screen is, as you
see below, where you can view the
logos of all the channels available in
the GUIDE Plus+ system in your
home. To enter the Grid at a specific
channel of your choice, press ' / " /
\ / | to select the logo and press
SET/ENTER.
P 00 1-Sep 16:47
Cancel
Timer Recording with
SHOWVIEW®
• The SHOWVIEW ® system allows you to
programme your Recorder for timer recording simply by inputting the SHOWVIEW number.
• The SHOWVIEW numbers are listed in most
newspapers, television guides, and local
CATV listings. Simply by inputting this
SHOWVIEW number, you can programme your
Recorder for timer recording, eliminating the
need to input programme start time, stop
time, channel, date and other information
usually necessary for timer recording.
• Up to 16 timer programmes can be stored
in a month. (This includes whole GUIDE
Plus+ timer recordings such as Manual
Recording.)
Home
Press |, \, ", or ' to select a channel, then press
ENTER to confirm and return to profile settings.
1
Press GUIDE to display the
GUIDE Plus+ screen.
2
Press ' / | to access the
“Schedule” Area through the
Menu Bar.
France2 [P 01]
Select a channel:
TF1 France 2 France 3 Canal t France 5
M6
Arte France 5 BBC1 CNN
MTV SKY1
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Timer Recording/The GUIDE Plus+® System
3
Press Red (A) to display the
SHOWVIEW screen.
P 00 1-Sep 16:51
Cancel
7
Press Green (B) to select
“Frequency”. With each press,
the selected option shifts (Once/
Daily/Monday to Friday/Monday
to Saturday/Weekly).
8
Press Yellow (C) to select
“Destination”. With each press,
the selected option toggles (HDD/
DVD).
9
Press | to proceed to the next
right recording tile (“Timing”).
Press Yellow (C) to select
“Timing” (select extra time to add
at the end or select VPS/PDC).
With each press, the selected
option shifts (+0/+10/+20/+30/VPSPDC).
Home
Please enter the ShowView programming number and
press ENTER to confirm.
= = = = = = = = =
Search
My TV
Schedule
Record Schedule
4
Info
Mode
Freq.
Dest.
SP
Once
HDD
1-Sep 16:20 17:00
France 2
SP
Once
HDD
1-Sep 18:00 19:00
France 3
LP
Once
DVD
Press Number buttons to enter
the SHOWVIEW programming
number.
P 00 1-Sep 16:46
Back
Cancel
Home
Please enter the ShowView programming number and
press ENTER to confirm.
• To set this to “VPS-PDC”, select
blank.
1 5 4 5 2 = = = =
Search
My TV
Schedule
Record Schedule
Mode
Info
Freq.
Dest.
SP
Once
HDD
1-Sep 16:20 17:00
France 2
SP
Once
HDD
1-Sep 18:00 19:00
France 3
LP
Once
DVD
10 When you have completed
entering the timer settings, press
GUIDE to exit.
11 (When you select “D:DVD” in step
5
Press SET/ENTER to confirm.
• “ERROR” will appear if you have
entered a number that is not a correct
SHOWVIEW number. If this happens
press ERASE to delete the numbers
as required and enter the correct
SHOWVIEW number.
• Check that the menu list agrees with
the times shown in the TV listing. If it
does not, press ERASE to return to
the SHOWVIEW system menu, then enter
the correct SHOWVIEW number.
The first time that you use the SHOWVIEW
system to make a recording on each channel
preset, “PR” may be highlighted on the OnScreen Display.
6
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Press | to highlight the right
recording tile of the scheduled
event. (Mode, Freq. and Dest.)
Then press Red (A) to select
“Mode” (Rec Mode). With each
press, the selected option shifts
(XP/SP/LP/EP/MN32/MN31/....../
MN1).
8, ensure the recordable DVD-RW/
R is inserted into the Recorder)
Press TIMER ON/OFF to place
the Recorder in Timer Standby
mode.
• The TIMER indicator on the front of
the Recorder lights up.
• The channel cannot be changed
during Timer Standby mode. To
change the channel, set Timer
Standby to off.
NOTE
• During the Timer Standby mode, you cannot
edit or add a timer programme. To edit or
cancel a timer programme, cancel Timer
Standby mode first.
• VPS/PDC is a signal broadcast by some TV
stations which adjusts the start and stop
time of your Recorder recording. This
ensures that if there is a change in broadcast time for your programme the Recorder
will still record the whole programme.
It is essential that the start time as it
appears in the TV listing is used to
programme the Recorder, as this information is used to identify the VPS/PDC signal
corresponding to your programme.
• When two consecutive timer recordings are
set, as data is still written to the disc after
first timer recording is stopped, the first
part of the next programme may not be
recorded.
Timer Recording/The GUIDE Plus+® System
• When you set a DVD as recording media,
timer recording will not start during disc
playback. If “ALTERNATIVE REC SETTING”
is set to “YES”, the programme will be timer
recorded to HDD.
• Timer recording will not start during
dubbing.
• Manual recording and editing cannot be
performed during timer standby.
3
P 00 1-Sep 17:18
Preparation for Timer Recording
• Check that the clock is displaying the
correct time.
• If the TIMER indicator on the front of the
Recorder is lit, press TIMER ON/OFF to
turn off the TIMER indicator and to set the
Timer Standby mode to off.
1
Press GUIDE to display the
GUIDE Plus+ screen.
2
1 Press ' / " / \ / | to access
the “Schedule” Area through
the Menu Bar.
P 00 1-Sep 17:13
ShowView
Manual
Home
'Schedule' displays programmes you've Set to Record.
Press " to use. Press the red button for ShowView
recording, the green button for manual recording, \
to view 'My TV' and | to view 'Info'.
Grid
Search
My TV
Record Schedule
1-Sep 16:20 17:00
France 2
1-Sep 18:00 19:00
France 3
Schedule
Mode Freq.
SP
Once
LP
Once
2 Press Green (B) (Manual).
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Dest.
HDD
DVD
Back
Next
Home
Please enter the recording date and press the green
button to confirm.
0 7 - Sep
Grid
Search
My TV
Record Schedule
Manual Recording (Timer
Recording by Specifying
Date, Time and Channel)
The operation method is the same for both
HDD and DVD.
• You can timer record up to 16 programmes
scheduled within a month, including the
whole GUIDE Plus+ system such as
SHOWVIEW system.
• You can consecutively record up to 12
hours to HDD.
1 Press ' / " / \ / | to enter the
recording date.
Schedule
Mode
Freq.
SP
Once
Dest.
HDD
1-Sep 16:20 17:00
France 2
SP
Once
HDD
1-Sep 18:00 19:00
France 3
LP
Once
DVD
2 Press Green (B) to proceed.
4
Press Number buttons and ' /
" / \ / | to enter the recording
start time, and press Green (B)
to proceed. Then enter the recording end time in a similar way and
press Green (B) to proceed.
5
Press Number buttons and ' /
" / \ / | to enter the recording
channel and press Green (B) to
proceed.
6
Press ' / " / \ / | and SET/
ENTER to enter characters for
the programme title, then press
Green (B) to save the entry.
• If you press Yellow (C) while you are
entering the programme title, the on
screen keyboard toggles as follows:
– Uppercase without accents
– Lowercase without accents
– Uppercase with accents
– Lowercase with accents
• After Green (B) is pressed, the right
recording tile (Mode, Freq., and
Dest.) is highlighted.
NOTE
• Sometimes you might notice that the left
programme tile displays the name of the
programme and sometimes only date and
time. The same applies for the synopsis.
While One-Button-Recordings are always
linked to the TV listings information,
SHOWVIEW recordings only “match” if they
are in the same time frame (next seven
days) and Manual recordings are not linked
to the TV listings data.
• You cannot set a timer programme which is
more than one month later from present.
• During the Timer Standby mode, you
cannot edit or add a timer programme. To
edit or add a timer programme, cancel
Timer Standby mode first.
Timer Recording/The GUIDE Plus+® System
7
Press RED (A) to select “Mode”
(Rec. Mode). With each press, the
selected option shifts (page 52).
8
Press Green (B) to select
“Frequency” (page 52).
9
Press Yellow (C) to select
“Destination” (page 52).
10 Press | to proceed to the next
right recording tile(“Timing”).
Press Yellow (C) to enter extra
time to add at the end or select
VPS/PDC (page 52).
• If any more timer recordings are to be
set, repeat steps 3 to 10.
11 When you have completed
entering the timer settings, press
GUIDE to exit from the “GUIDE
Plus+” screen.
12 (When you select “D:DVD” in step
9, ensure the recordable DVD-RW/
R is inserted into the Recorder.)
Press TIMER ON/OFF to place
the Recorder in Timer Standby
mode.
• The TIMER indicator on the front of
the Recorder lights up.
• The channel cannot be changed
during Timer Standby mode. To
change the channel, set Timer
Standby to off.
• During Time Standby mode, “BLUE
SCREEN” is displayed on TV screen.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
NOTE
• VPS/PDC is a signal broadcast by some TV
stations which adjusts the start and stop
time of your Recorder’s recording. This
ensures that if there is a change in
broadcast time for your programme the
Recorder will still record the whole
programme.
It is essential that the start time as it
appears in the TV listing is used to
programme the Recorder, as this information is used to identify the VPS/PDC signal
corresponding to your programme.
• Data is still written to the disc after first
timer recording is stopped, the first part of
the next programme may not be recorded.
• When you set a DVD as recording media,
timer recording will not start during disc
playback. If “ALTERNATIVE REC SETTING”
is set to “YES”, the programme will be timer
recorded to HDD.
• Timer recording will not start during dubbing.
• Manual recording and editing cannot be
performed during timer standby.
Timer Recording/The GUIDE Plus+® System
Editing (Confirm, Change
and Cancel) a Timer
Programme
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
Changing
1
Follow steps 1 to 2 of
“Confirming” described above.
2
Press ' / " to highlight the
scheduled event that you would
like to edit.
3
Press \ / | to highlight the setting
to be changed and correct it by
using the corresponding colour
buttons, ' / " / \ / | or the
Number buttons.
The operation method is the same for both
HDD and DVD.
About Schedule Area
The “Schedule” Area is the central location for
you to examine, set, delete and edit scheduled
events. Within the “Schedule” Area you can:
What you can edit here are as follows:
• Change date
• Change Start /End Time
• Change the source
• Press Red (A) to change the REC
MODE.
• Press Green (B) to change the
Recording Frequency (Once/Daily/
Weekly).
• Press Yellow (C) to change the
destination.
• On the next right recording tile, press
Yellow (C) to add extra time to the
end or to choose VPS/PDC.
Edit/Delete a One-Button-Record (Page 49)
Set/Edit/Delete a SHOWVIEW recording (Page
51)
Set/Edit/Delete a Manual Recording (Page 53)
Confirming
You can confirm on the Timer setting screen a
list of all timer programmes that are already
set.
Preparations for timer confirmation
• If the TIMER indicator on the front of the
Recorder is lit, press TIMER ON/OFF to
turn off the TIMER indicator and to set the
Timer Standby mode to off.
1
Press GUIDE to display the
“GUIDE Plus+” screen.
2
Press ' / | to display the
“Schedule” Area.
P 00 1-Sep 17:13
ShowView
Manual
4
Cancelling
Home
1
Follow steps 1 to 2 of
“Confirming” described left.
2
Press ' / " to highlight the timer
recording to be cancelled, then
press Red (A).
3
Press GUIDE to exit.
'Schedule' displays programmes you've Set to Record.
Press " to use. Press the red button for ShowView
recording, the green button for manual recording, \
to view 'My TV' and | to view 'Info'.
Grid
3
4
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Search
My TV
Record Schedule
1-Sep 16:20 17:00
France 2
1-Sep 18:00 19:00
France 3
Schedule
Mode Freq.
SP
Once
LP
Press GUIDE to exit.
Dest.
HDD
Once
DVD
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
event to confirm.
If the settings are correct, press
GUIDE to exit.
NOTE
• If there are some programmes to be
recorded, do not forget to press TIMER
ON/OFF to return the Recorder to Timer
Standby mode.
• If you turn off the Timer Standby mode
during timer recording, the timer recording
is switched to a normal recording which will
not stop at the timer recording end time. To
stop the recording, press REC STOP.
• When the Recorder is in Timer Standby
mode but a timer recording is not in
progress, you can neither add nor change
a timer programme but can cancel one.
When a timer recording is in progress, you
can neither add, change, nor cancel a
timer programme.
Timer Recording/The GUIDE Plus+® System
Other Functions of the
GUIDE Plus+ System
Lock/Unlock Video Window
When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system the
channel you were watching remains visible in
the video window (Top left part of the screen,
see the screen image below). The date stamp
above the window lets you know what
channel, day and time it is.
The default setting for the video window is
“locked”. The lock icon above the video
window displays a “closed” lock. In lock
position, as you move up and down through
the listings grid, the video window stays
tuned to your channel so you can continue
watching your show while using the GUIDE
Plus+ system. You can also “unlock” the
video window so that it tunes to each channel
you select in the grid as you cursor through
the listings.
You would usually set channel details during
the initial setup but you can also change such
settings later, if for example, a new channel
becomes available, you are changing from
cable to satellite or you are moving. You can
do so from the “Editor” Area which is the
central location for you to manage your
channels. Every change in the “Editor” Area
leads to a change in the Grid (The GUIDE
Plus+ “Home” screen).
In the “Editor” area, you can:
• Turn a channel ON/OFF (If you turn it ON,
you can use it in the GUIDE Plus+ System.
If you turn it OFF, it will be deactivated.)
• Change the Source of a channel (Tuner/
External Receiver 1)
• Change the Programme Number of a
channel
For example: Turning a channel ON/OFF:
1
LOCK
P 00 1-Sep 17:21
Change Channel Settings
Record
Channels
• When the GUIDE Plus+ setup is not
yet completed, press Blue (D) before
proceeding to Step 2.
Home
Voyage: Les Patrimoines Mondiaux: Présente les
patrimoines naturels et culturels du monde.
[P 02]
17:20 ( 40Min)
My TV
Grid
Search
Wed,1
17:00
17:30
ZDF
i
Schedule
Chaîns
The
Agents
Show
Avec… Neighbours
Voyage : Les Patrimoines…
précédents Talk
TF1
The Agents
Météo
Neighbours
\Informations
The
Agents
Weakest: Les
LinkPatrimoines…
Show
Avec… Voyage
France 2 Talk
Press GUIDE to display the
GUIDE Plus+ screen.
2
Heartbeat
de Foot|
France 3 Championnat
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
“Editor” Area.
Heartbeat
Nature Merveilleuse (2) La Forêt Pluviale...
Canal t La
News
FatalTV
Flaw
Magazine
de ... five
Le Jardin|
France 5 LeKojak:
P 00 1-Sep 16:41
Home
'Editor' displays your channel settings. You may turn
a channel On (blue) or Off (grey) and identify its
Source and Programme Number. Press " to use.
Press \ to view 'Info'. Press | to view 'Setup'.
1
My TV
Name
Press GUIDE to display GUIDE
Plus+ screen.
• When the GUIDE Plus+ setup is not
yet completed, press Blue (D) before
proceeding to Step 2.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to highlight the
channel logo of the channel that
you would like to unlock. The
channel logos are displayed at the
left side of the programme tiles.
• The red action button at the top of the
screen will now display the word
“Unlock”.
3
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Press Red (A) (Unlock).
• The channel tuner will be unlocked
and the lock icon above the video
window displays an “open” lock. Now
as you use the GUIDE Plus+ system,
the video window will display the
current on-air video of each channel
you select. For the remainder of this
TV viewing session, the video window
remains unlocked as you go in and
out of the GUIDE Plus+ system.
• To “lock” the video window again,
simply move the highlight on the
respective channel logo and press
Red (A) again.
Schedule
On/Off
Info
Source
Editor
Prog. No.
TF1
On
Tuner
P 001
France 2
On
Tuner
P 002
France 3
On
Tuner
P 003
Canal t
On
Tuner
P 004
France 5
On
Tuner
P 005
3
Press ' / " / \ / | to highlight the
left tile of the channel that you
would like to edit.
4
Press Red (A) to turn the channel
on/off.
• To change the source, press Red (A)
after highlighting the right tile of the
channel.
• To change the programme number,
press Green (B) after highlighting the
right tile of the channel.
Timer Recording/The GUIDE Plus+® System
Configure the GUIDE
Plus+ System
You can configure the GUIDE Plus+ system
from the “Setup” Area.
Here, you can set/change your language,
country and postal code. Also you can add/
change your external receivers details. These
can be done in the “Setup” area.
The entries for “Language” and “Country” are
imported from your earlier selection, during
“Auto Installation” or from “OSD Language”
under “Start Menu” or during Setup of the
GUIDE Plus+ System. You can change them
if necessary.
The entry for “Postal Code” is essential in
order to receive TV listings data.
The settings for “External Receivers” must be
done if you use the GUIDE Plus+ system with
an external receiver. Select appropriate
options on the screen.
For example: Changing the Postal Code in
your Recorder:
1
Press GUIDE to display the
GUIDE Plus+ screen.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
“Setup”, then press SET/ENTER
twice.
BBC2 1-Sep 16:45
Home
Setup
Press ' or " to select. Then press ENTER to
confirm.
Settings
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Language
Country
Postal Code
External Receiver 1
English
France
None
None
External Receiver 2
None
External Receiver 3
None
3
Press ' / " to highlight the part
that you would like to change,
then press SET/ENTER.
4
Press the Number buttons or ' /
" to make your changes, then
press SET/ENTER to confirm.
NOTE
• It is very important that you enter correct
settings for the country and post code for
your current domicile in order to receive TV
listings correctly.
• Some changes (e.g. country, postal code)
might require a new download of TV listings
information. This can take up to 24 hours.
• When TV listings data is being downloaded, the Front Panel Display appears as
follows:
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)
See the table below for details.
DVD-RAM
—
—
DVD+RW/R
—
—
Dubbing Direction and Dubbing Speed
Dubbing
Direction
Dubbing Constant Speed
Speed (Rate Conversion
Dubbing)
High Speed
(High Speed
Dubbing)
HDD→DVD-RW
(VR mode)
✕
✕
HDD→DVD-RW/R
(Video mode)
✕
√
DVD-RW→HDD
(VR mode)
✕
DVD-RW/R→HDD
(Video mode)
*2
✕
*1
✕
—
✕ Can dub.
— Cannot dub.
√ Can High Speed Dub the recorded title if it is recorded
using “HI SP DUB PRIORITY”.
*1 Some titles recorded to DVD-RW in VR mode by DVD
Recorder of other manufacturers than Sharp may not be
used for High Speed Dubbing. If such a title emerges
during the High Speed Dubbing, the dubbing afterwards
will be carried out as Rate Conversion Dubbing.
*2 Regarding DVD-RW (Video mode) and DVD-R discs,
only those discs recorded by a Sharp DVD recorder can
be dubbed to HDD. The discs recorded by a DVD
recorder of other manufacturers than Sharp may not be
dubbed to HDD.
Dubbing Types
VR Format
• Enables repeated recording and various types of editing
with DVD-RW discs. If you use discs that support CPRM,
“Copy Once” programmes can be recorded.
Video Format
• Has editing limitations, but provides high-compatibility for
playback on other DVD players.
Dubbing Speed
There are three types of dubbing, each with a respective
dubbing speed, as follows.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
When dubbing titles including “Copy Once” enabled
programme on HDD to DVD-RW, use DVD-RW (VR mode)
Ver.1.1 CPRM compatible disc or Ver.1.2 CPRM compatible
disc.
“Copy Once” enabled programme recorded to HDD will
move (recorded programme will be erased after the move)
to DVD-RW.
“Copy Once” enabled programme can/can not be dubbed
depending on dubbing format or dubbing direction. See the
table below.
Dubbing
Direction
Original
DVD-RW/R
From HDD
Play list
To HDD
Titles Including “Copy Once”
Enabled Programme
Original
Discs that can be used for Dubbing
Play list
• Can dub up to 10 titles (programmes) in one session.
• Cannot dub programmes that are not recorded properly.
• It is DVD-RW/R discs that can be used for dubbing with
the Recorder. (DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-RAM cannot be
used for dubbing.)
HDD→DVD
You can dub from HDD to DVD and DVD to HDD. It is
recommended to dub important programmes recorded on
HDD to DVD for safe keeping.
• High-Speed Dubbing (Max 48x): Maximum*3 speed of
approximately 48x (24x
when 4x discs are
used)
• High-Speed Dubbing (Max 12x): Maximum*3 speed of
approximately 12x
• Rate Conversion Dubbing (1x): Same time as original
that is being dubbed
*3 Dubbing speed as converted into the EP mode.
DVD→HDD
Dubbing Method and Dubbing
Types
Dubbing
Speed
HighSpeed
(High Speed
Dubbing)
Constant Speed
(Rate Conversion
Dubbing)
Copy Free
✕
✕
Copy Once
✕ (Move)
✕ (Move)
Copy Free
✕
✕
Copy Once
—
—
Copy Free
✕
✕
Copy Once
—
—
Copy Free
✕
✕
Copy Once
—
—
Dubbing “Copy Once” Enabled Title
• You cannot dub “Copy Once” enabled programme in
Video mode even if you use DVD-RW Ver.1.1 CPRM
compatible disc or Ver.1.2 CPRM compatible disc.
• “Copy Once” titles that have been recorded on DVD-RW
disc cannot be dubbed to HDD. When a title (Play list)
which includes both “Copy Once” and “Copy Free” is
dubbed by “High Speed Dubbing” to HDD, the dubbing
is interrupted when “Copy Once” title emerges. The titles
afterwards will not be dubbed.
• When dubbing “Copy Once” enabled programme from
HDD to DVD-RW (CPRM compatible) is stopped in the
middle, the part that was already dubbed will be erased
from HDD. If you restart the dubbing, you can dub the
remaining part as a different title but the start point of the
latter may not match the end point of the former.
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)
Rate Conversion Dubbing
and High Speed Dubbing
Rate Conversion Dubbing
Plays back titles of HDD and dubs to DVD-RW/R or plays
back titles of DVD-RW/R and dubs to HDD.
• Picture quality (recording mode) for dubbing can be
selected. You can select among 32 levels of recording
modes so it is convenient when you want to fit the
programmes into one disc.
• You can select among 32 levels of recording mode by
using Manual setting but picture quality will not exceed
that of the original.
• To do Rate Conversion Dubbing, it takes as long as the
original recording time of the source title.
Notes on Rate Conversion Dubbing
• “Dolby Virtual Surround” (page 78) is set to “OFF” when
Rate Conversion Dubbing is used.
• “DVD AUDIO OUT LEVEL” (page 112) is set to “NO” when
Rate Conversion Dubbing is used.
• The image might look longer vertically when you dub 16:9
image from HDD to DVD-RW/R (Video mode) using Rate
Conversion Dubbing. In such a case, see the Operation
Manual of the TV and adjust TV setting.
• When dubbing a bilingual broadcast that was recorded
with “HI SP DUB SETTING” as “NO” (page 104), the “L
CH” and “R CH” audio are heard mixed together. In such
a case, it is not possible to switch between “L CH” and “R
CH” audio.
• Chapter markers might slightly shift when dubbed using
Rate Conversion Dubbing.
• You cannot record 16:9 (wide) and 4:3 (normal) screen
size images in one title, in order to perform High Speed
Dubbing.
• When the screen size of the title changes during High
Speed Dubbing, the Recorder continues to dub in the
initial screen size.
High Speed Dubbing
Copies titles recorded on HDD or DVD without degradation
in image quality and recording time, as if copying data with
PC.
There are two options for High Speed Dubbing: Max. 48x
and Max. 12x.
NOTE
• When you select High Speed Dubbing Up To 48x, the
dubbing speed goes up to 8x (48x as converted into
EP)*1. Therefore, the amount of operating noise increases,
but this is not due to a malfunction. When you select High
Speed Dubbing Up To 12x, the dubbing speed goes up
to 2x (12x as converted into EP).
*1 When using an 8x disc.
• When you feel that the operating noise is a nuisance (e.g,
late at night), select High-speed dubbing (Up To 12x) or
Rate Conversion Dubbing.
• The time required for High Speed Dubbing varies
according to the recording mode of title (programme) to
dub or type of disc you use.
• When a new (unused) 2x or 4x compatible DVD-RW disc
is initialised with another DVD recorder, dubbing may be
performed at 1x speed even when High Speed Dubbing
is selected.
• If you perform High Speed Dubbing of a “Copy Once”
enabled programme,
dubbing will not be done at 2x- or
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com
Sharp Manuals
4x-speed even if you use a 2x- or 4x- compatible disc.
Notes on High Speed Dubbing from HDD to
DVD (Video mode)
• During High Speed Dubbing, you cannot monitor the
programme being dubbed on the TV screen. (You can
only watch live broadcast.)
• Do not interrupt the High Speed Dubbing. If you stop in
the middle of process, the recorded title might be erased.
• You cannot High Speed Dub a Playlist to a Video format
disc.
Notes on High Speed Dubbing from DVD to
HDD
• Titles recorded on DVD with a DVD recorder of another
manufacturer than Sharp may not be used for High Speed
Dubbing. If such a title emerges during the process, the
dubbing stops and the remaining titles will not be
dubbed.
• High-Speed Dubbing from DVD-R or DVD-RW (Video
format) to the HDD is not possible.
Setting High Speed Dubbing Priority
• To perform High Speed Dubbing from HDD to DVD, you
should in advance set “HI SP DUB SETTING” as “YES”
and record the source title on HDD. This function enables
High Speed Dubbing in both VR mode and Video mode.
• If a title is recorded with “HI SP DUB SETTING” set to
“NO”, you cannot perform High Speed Dubbing to DVDRW in Video mode and to DVD-R.
• In order to perform High Speed Dubbing to DVD-RW in
VR format, you do not have to set this as “YES”.
• Cancel High Speed Dubbing Priority when you want to
edit frames of titles recorded to HDD using High Speed
Dubbing. You can edit the frames after the cancellation.
• Once you cancel the High Speed Dubbing Priority to a
title, you cannot set it again for that title.
• When you record a programme with bilingual broadcast
with “HI SP DUB SETTING” set to “YES”, either “L CH” or
“R CH” audio which is selected in “BILINGUAL SETTING”
(page 104) is recorded. You cannot record both L and R
channels.
• When recording 16:9 size image in LP, EP or MN1-17
recording modes with “HI SP DUB SETTING” set as
“YES”, the image will be recorded as 4:3 (squeezed).
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)
Limitation during Dubbing
You cannot dub from HDD to DVD-RW/R in
the following cases.
• Total number of titles in DVD-RW/R reached 99 or total
number of chapters reached 999.
• HDD or DVD-RW/R is either recording or playing back.
• The DVD-RW/R disc is protected.
• The DVD-RW/R disc is full.
You cannot dub from DVD-RW/R to HDD in
the following cases.
• Not enough HDD capacity. (When there is not enough
capacity in HDD, the Recorder will continue the dubbing
until there is no more capacity.)
• Total number of titles in HDD reached 199 or total number
of chapters reached 999.
• HDD or DVD-RW/R is either recording or playing back.
• “Copy Once” enabled programme recorded on DVD-RW/
R can not be dubbed. If you try to dub such a title with
High Speed Dubbing, the dubbing will terminate. If you try
to dub such a title with Rate Conversion Dubbing, the
dubbing will be paused.
• You cannot dub from DVD Video disc to HDD.
• You cannot dub “Copy Once” enabled programme
recorded on DVD-RW to the HDD.
• Regarding DVD-RW (Video mode) and DVD-R discs, only
those discs recorded by a Sharp DVD recorder can be
dubbed to HDD. The discs recorded by a DVD recorder
of other manufacturers than Sharp may not be dubbed to
HDD.
Dubbing a title from HDD to multiple DVDs by
dividing into parts
• If you want to dub a title from HDD to multiple DVDs
(because, for example, the title is so long that it doesn’t fit
in one DVD), you can create a playlist out of the title (page
88) and dub playlist by playlist, or you can divide the title
into chapters by “DIVIDE CHAPTER” (page 86) and dub
chapter by chapter.
• To set “Rec. Mode” in such a case, do NOT select “Exact
Dubbing”.
• To do dubbing in this way, stop the dubbing manually by
pressing HSTOP/LIVE or REC STOP twice.
• “Copy Once” enabled title is moved (automatically erased
from HDD as dubbed to DVD). Replace DVD with next
one and continue dubbing.
• “Copy Once” enabled title cannot be dubbed by creating
playlist or dubbed chapter by chapter.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Title names and chapter markers are copied
as follows
HDD↔DVD (VR mode)
✕
Chapter
Marker
*1 ✕
HDD→DVD (Video mode)
✕
*2 —
DVD (Video mode)→HDD
✕
—
Title Name
Chapter
Marker
HDD→DVD (VR mode)
✕
✕
HDD→DVD (Video mode)
✕
*3
✕
DVD (VR mode)→HDD
✕
*1
✕
Rate Conversion Dubbing
High Speed Dubbing
Title Name
✕ Can dub.
— Cannot dub.
*1 When a title with a chapter of 3 seconds or shorter,
recorded by another manufacturer than Sharp, is
dubbed from DVD to HDD, the chapter markers are not
copied.
*2 Chapter marker of the dubbed title will not be copied
when you dub from HDD to DVD-RW/R (Video mode)
using rate conversion dubbing function. The chapters
will be inserted according to the setting of auto chapter
(either “10 min”, “15 min”, or “30 min”).
*3 During dubbing from HDD to DVD-RW/R (Video mode)
maximum chapter markers that could be dubbed using
high speed dubbing is 99 per title.
• Thumbnail will not be dubbed.
NOTE
• You cannot operate other functions during dubbing.
- Timer programming will not start during dubbing.
- You cannot record to HDD or playback titles on HDD
during dubbing.
• Even if you select High Speed Dubbing you may not be
able to increase the speed of dubbing from 1x depending
on titles you want to dub and types of disc.
• When title on HDD that includes “Copy Once” enabled
title is divided into several chapters, you can add all the
chapters to dubbing list by adding one of the chapters to
dubbing list.
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)
When dubbing in chapter units,
press Red (A) (THUMBNAIL), and
then Green (B) (CHAPTER). You
can select only the chapters
within a single title.
Dubbing (HDD↔DVD)/
High Speed Dubbing
(HDD→DVD)
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
• Setting toggles between “dubbing”
and “dubbing cancelled” each time
you press SET/ENTER.
• Select more titles when you want to
dub multiple titles. (You can dub up to
10 titles at once.)
DVD-R
Important!
• When dubbing from the HDD to DVD,
insert a recordable disc (VR format or
video format).
• When dubbing from DVD to the HDD,
insert the disc on which the programme
to be dubbed is recorded.
HDD ORIGINAL s DVD
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
DUBBING
TOTAL TIME FOR SELEC: 1h00
DVD REMAIN TIME: 1h10m
SP
1
PR 1 SP
ARD
21 / 5
SAT 10:00
60 m. SP
• You can choose titles and chapters as the
unit to dub.
• Read the description on pages 58 to 60
before dubbing.
Load a recordable disc onto the
disc tray.
• Load the disc formatted in either VR
mode or Video mode.
2
Press START MENU to display
the “START MENU” screen.
3
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(“DUBBING”), then press SET/
ENTER.
4
Press ' / " to select “HIGH
SPEED DUBBING UP TO 48x”,
“HIGH SPEED DUBBING UP TO
12x” or “RATE CONVERSION
DUBBING”, then press SET/
ENTER.
• When dubbing a title recorded to a
video format DVD-RW/R with the “HI
SP DUB SETTING” set to “NO”, select
Rate Conversion Dubbing.
6
3
5
6
/ ENTER SELECT AND ENTER THE D BUTTON
TITLE LIST
CHAPTER
EXIT
NEXT STEP
Dubbing mark is displayed to selected
titles. Numbers will be assigned in order
of selection and dubbing will start
according to the numbers assigned.
7
Press Blue (D) (NEXT STEP).
• When high-speed dubbing has been
selected, skip to step 10.
• When rate conversion dubbing has
been selected, skip to step 8.
8
Press ' / " to select the recording mode (picture quality), then
press SET/ENTER.
HDD ORIGINAL s DVD
22 / 7 [FRI]10 : 10
DUBBING
SP
TOTAL TIME FOR SELEC: 1h00
DVD REMAIN TIME: 1h10m
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title to dub, then press SET/
ENTER.
XP: MODE 32
SP: MODE 21
LP: MODE 9
EP: MODE 1
MODE 2
MN (MANUAL)
REC. MODE: 32 (REFERENCE VALUE
FOR THE CURRENT DISC)
EXACT DUBBING
SET
• You cannot select “EXACT DUBBING”
when you dub from DVD to HDD.
• It is not possible to set a recording
mode for each individual title.
When “MN (MANUAL)” is selected:
• Set picture quality with ' / " , then press
SET/ENTER. (Picture quality can be
selected from 32 levels.)
HDD ORIGINAL s DVD
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
DUBBING
TOTAL TIME FOR SELEC: 1h00
DVD REMAIN TIME: 1h10m
MN21
SELECT REC MODE.
XP: MODE 32
SP: MODE 21
LP: MODE 9
EP: MODE 1
MODE 21
MN (MANUAL)
REC. MODE: 32 (REFERENCE VALUE
FOR THE CURRENT DISC)
EXACT DUBBING
SET
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
EXIT
SELECT REC MODE.
Press ' / " to select dubbing
direction (“HDD → DVD” or “DVD
→ HDD”), then press SET/
ENTER.
• To perform dubbing from DVD-RW/R
(Video mode), go to Step 6.
5
2
NEW
4
NOTE
• “Copy Once” enabled programmes cannot
be dubbed by the chapter.
1
1
NEW
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)
Selecting Exact Dubbing
• Select Exact Dubbing when there are
multiple titles (up to 10) you want to dub
and you know you cannot fit all into one
disc. The Recorder will select the
appropriate recording mode and fit all titles
into one disc (maximum 6 hours).
• You cannot dub titles in higher quality than
the original.
• The Recorder will lower the recording
mode when there is not enough capacity in
the disc to dub compared to the length of
all the titles (programmes). Be aware that
original “Copy Once” enabled programme
will be erased after dubbing.
9
Press SET/ENTER when “SET”
is highlighted.
10 1 Press \/ | to select “YES” if
you let the Recorder perform
“AUTO FINALISE” after the
dubbing is completed.
Otherwise select “NO”. Then
press SET/ENTER.
2 Press SET/ENTER at the
confirmation screen.
• Playback starts from the selected
track.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
To Stop Dubbing
1
Press ■STOP/LIVE or REC
STOP twice.
• To stop dubbing by operating the
buttons on the Recorder, press the
REC STOP button on either the DVD
side (right) or the HDD side (left).
NOTE
• When a “Copy Once” enabled title
recorded on HDD is dubbed to DVD-RW
(CPRM compatible), data is “moved” (what
is dubbed to DVD is erased from HDD.)
Front Panel Display during
Dubbing
• |PLAY of media of original source and
æREC indicator of media to dub light up
during dubbing.
Eliminating Problems (Recording, Timer Recording, Dubbing)
When You Cannot Record
Problem
•
•
•
•
•
•
No disc in the Recorder.
Unrecordable disc is loaded.
Not enough disc capacity.
Recorder cannot identify the disc.
Disc is protected.
Not enough HDD capacity.
• In the middle of dubbing.
Suggested Solution
• Load recordable DVD.
•
•
•
•
Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.
Please wait until the disc is recognized.
Cancel disc protection or change to new DVD for recording.
Erase recorded programmes you don’t want from HDD to
create necessary capacity to record.
• You cannot record during dubbing. Stop dubbing before
starting a new recording.
When You Cannot Dub
Problem
• Title protection is set to copy once
enabled title (programme).
• No disc in the Recorder.
• Unrecordable disc is loaded.
• Not enough disc capacity.
• Recorder cannot identify the disc.
• Disc is protected.
• Not enough HDD capacity.
• In the middle of recording/playback.
• Recorded “Copy Once” enabled title
(programme) to DVD.
• A DVD+RW, DVD+R, or DVD-RAM has
been inserted as the dubbing source.
Suggested Solution
• You cannot dub Copy Once enabled title (programme) for
which “TITLE PROTECT SET” is set as “YES”.
• Load recordable DVD.
•
•
•
•
Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.
Please wait until the disc is recognized.
Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD.
Erase unnecessary programmes from HDD to create necessary capacity to record.
• You cannot dub during recording/playback. Stop the recording/playback.
• “Copy Once” enabled title (programme) or title with signal
that prohibits copying recorded to DVD cannot be dubbed to
HDD.
• This Recorder can use DVD-RW and DVD-R for performing
dubbing from DVD to HDD.
(DVD+RW, DVD+R, and DVD-RAM cannot be used.)
When You Cannot High Speed Dub
Problem
•
•
•
•
•
•
No disc in the Recorder.
Unrecordable disc is loaded.
Not enough disc capacity.
Recorder cannot identify the disc.
Disc is protected.
Trying to high speed dub from HDD to
DVD in Video mode.
• Cannot High Speed Dub although “HI
SP DUB SETTING” is set to “YES”.
Suggested Solution
• Load recordable DVD.
•
•
•
•
Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.
Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.
Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD.
You cannot high speed dub from HDD to DVD in Video mode
if “HI SP DUB SETTING” was not set to “YES” when the
original title was recorded to HDD.
• Use a high-speed dubbing compatible disc (2x, 4x, 8x).
Even when a high-speed dubbing compatible disc is used, the
dubbing speed may be reduced due to the condition of the
disc, etc.
• High speed dubbing of “Copy Once” enabled title will take
longer than normal high speed dubbing.
NOTE
• When two timer programmes have been set consecutively, in order to start recording from the top of the next programme,
recording of the preceding programme is ended before the scheduled end time.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Eliminating Problems (Recording, Timer Recording, Dubbing)
When You Cannot Timer Record
Problem
•
•
•
•
•
No disc in the Recorder.
Unrecordable disc is loaded.
Not enough disc capacity.
Recorder cannot identify the disc.
Disc is protected.
• Not enough HDD capacity.
• Number of timer programmes set has
reached the limit.
• Dubbing is in progress.
• Playing back the DVD.
• In the middle of editing the DVD disc.
• The GUIDE Plus+ screen is completely
empty or some information (such as
logos) are missing.
• The external receiver cannot be
controlled from the GUIDE Plus+
system of the Recorder.
Suggested Solution
• Load recordable DVD.
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.
• Please wait until the disc is recognized.
• Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD for
recording.
• Erase recorded programmes you don’t want from HDD to
create necessary capacity to record.
• Erase unnecessary timer programmes.
• Timer recording does not work during dubbing. Stop dubbing before starting a new timer recording.
• Stop playing back the DVD more than 3 minutes before timer
recording starts. If you don’t stop playback until timer
recording start time, timer recording will not start. (When
“ALTERNATIVE REC SET” has been set, the alternative
recording is performed to the HDD.)
• Timer recording does not function during editing of the DVD
disc. Stop editing before the preset start time for timer
recording.
• Download the GUIDE Plus+ data. Leave the Recorder
STANDBY (NOT ON) and wait overnight.
• In doing so, make sure to select your country and postal
code correctly.
• Make sure that the G-LINK cable is connected correctly. The
infrared transmitter should be in front of the external receiver,
pointing towards the infrared receptor of the external
receiver.
• Make sure to select the correct code for the external receiver.
NOTE
• When the start time for timer recording comes during editing of HDD, the editing is interrupted and the timer recording is
executed.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
HDD Playback
• Press Red (A) (THUMBNAIL) to
switch from title list to thumbnail.
• Press Green (B) to sort the titles.
They can be sorted by the following
order types: “FROM NEW”, “FROM
OLD” and “TITLES”.
REC LIST: If you select the programme you
want to watch from the list of recorded
programmes (REC LIST) and press SET/
ENTER, playback will begin.
NOTE
• To display the counter during playback,
press ON SCREEN (under the cover)
(page 32).
• During playback of video which has been
edited (for example, by making a play list),
Seamless Playback functions for smoother
playback of the transitions between
scenes.
• During playback, you cannot start the
GUIDE Plus+ System by pressing GUIDE.
3
Thumbnail screen: Press ' / " /
K/ Lto switch pages.
Title Name List screen: Press ' / " to
select a title name.
4
HDD
Press HDD to select HDD mode.
• The HDD mode indicator in the front
panel display appears.
• HDD mode is selected automatically
when the power is turned on.
• The following message appears when
the mode has been switched from
DVD to HDD.
CHANGED TO HDD MODE.
2
Press REC LIST to display “REC
LIST (THUMBNAIL)”.
• The REC LIST can also be displayed
from the START MENU (see page 27).
• To switch between Original Title List
and Play List, press ORIGINAL/PLAY
LIST. Each time the button is
pressed, “ORIGINAL” (original titles)
or “PLAY LIST” is selected in turn.
ORIGINAL
2
ZDF
25 / 5
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
PR 2 XP
60 m. XP
WED 10 : 00
1
2
NEW
NEW
4
ENTER
ENTER
CHAPTER
6
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
FUNCTION MENU
• If you press Red (A) (TITLE LIST), you
can switch to title list.
TITLE LIST
REC. LIST(HDD: ORIGINAL)
2
ZDF
25 / 5
NEW
NEW
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
22 / 7 [FRI]10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
PR 2 XP
60 m. XP
TITLE
REC. DATE
25/ 5 WED
PR 2 XP
21/ 5 SAT
PR 1 SP
30/ 4 SAT
PR 4 XP
28/ 4 THU
PR 5 XP
28/ 4 THU
PR 2 LP
PR 1 EP
20/ 4 WED
[FROM NEW]
WED 10 : 00
1
2
3
4
5
6
NEXT
SELECT
THUMBNAIL
ENTER
(
ENTER
SORT
Fast Reverse is Approx. 2g)
• When you select
Fast Forward
Playback (Forward only) you can
enjoy audio together with video
(Rapid play).
5
Press ■STOP/LIVE to stop
playback.
3
5
SELECT
TITLE LIST
(Approx. 1.5g) (Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)
PLAY LIST
REC. LIST(HDD ORIGINAL)
Press SET/ENTER or |PLAY.
• Playback starts from the selected title
(chapter).
When you have selected a title for
playback, resume playback (playback starting from the point at which
the video was last stopped) is
performed. When there is no resumption information, playback is started
from the beginning of the title.
• Live broadcast is resumed automatically after playback of the title has
been completed.
• |PLAY button on the HDD (left) side
of Recorder is lit green during
playback.
• To fast forward or fast reverse: Press
JFWD or GREV during playback.
Each time these buttons are pressed,
the speed cycles through the
following settings:
Press |PLAY to return to normal
playback.
Playback from REC LIST
1
Press ' / "/ \ / | to select the
programme you want to watch.
RETURN
TIME
60 m
60 m
30 m
30 m
90 m
120 m
EXIT
MODE
XP
SP
XP
XP
LP
EP
6/7 TITLES
EXIT
FUNCTION MENU
NOTE
• The final few seconds may not be played
back, depending on how the recording was
stopped.
• The end position of the programme played
back may be shifted slightly from the
position where recording was stopped
during recording.
HDD Playback
Resume playback function
• If you press |PLAY again, playback will
resume from the point where it was
previously stopped.
• To playback from the beginning, follow the
procedure below:
1Select the title to play back from Rec List
and press Blue (D).
2Press ' / " to select “PLAYBACK”, then
SET/ENTER.
3Press \ / | to select “FROM
BEGINNING”, then SET/ENTER.
NOTE
• For titles of VR mode, it is the image of
about 2 minutes after the start of the
recording that is displayed as Thumbnail.
• For titles of Video mode, it is the image at
the beginning of the recording that is
displayed as Thumbnail.
Icons Displayed in Title Info
Field of REC LIST
NEW TITLE
(Disappears when you playback, edit
or set Title Protection to the title. Also,
in the case of DVD, disappears when
the disc is ejected.)
Inserting Chapter Markers
during Playback
• You can insert chapter markers by pressing
CHAPTER MARK. Chapter markers are
inserted after the message “RECORDED
CHAPTER MARKER.” appears.
You can insert Chapter Markers during
Playback only for titles on HDD or DVD-RW
(VR format).
• You cannot insert chapter markers in the
following cases.
• A title recorded on DVD-RW (Video
format)
• A title recorded on DVD-R
• During Simultaneous playback
• During Chasing playback
TITLE PROTECTION
(HDD, DVD-RW [VR mode] only)
“Copy Once” enabled Programme
(Copy Restricted) (HDD only)
High Speed Dubbing Priority setting
(HDD only)
TITLE NOT RECORDED PROPERLY
(HDD only)
Playback by Selecting
Title Number (Direct Playback)
HDD
About REC LIST
When the REC LIST is displayed, you can use
the following functions by pressing Red (A) or
Green (B) on the remote control.
• Switch between Thumbnail screen and Title
Name List screen by pressing Red (A).
• When Thumbnail screen is selected, switch
between Title List and Chapter List by
pressing Green (B).
Chapters in selected title will be displayed
in Chapter List.
• Sort the Title List in the “FROM NEW”,
“FROM OLD” or “TITLES” (alphabetical)
order.
1 Press Green (B).
2 Press \ / | to select “FROM NEW”,
“FROM OLD” or “TITLES”, then press
SET/ENTER.
• Calls up miscellaneous functions such as
- “PLAYBACK”
- “ERASE”
- “EDIT”
- (Cancel) “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” (for
original titles on HDD only)
- “CHANGE TITLE NAME”
- “TITLE PROTECT SET”
To the selected title by pressing Blue (D).
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
You can start playback from the title you want
to see.
1
Press HDD to select HDD mode.
• The HDD mode indicator in the front
panel display appears.
2
Press DIRECT while the disc is /
is not played back.
Example: When DIRECT is pressed while the
disc is not played back.
LIVE
---/83
3
Press ' / " to select the title
number to play back, then press
SET/ENTER.
• Playback starts from the beginning of
the selected title.
NOTE
• You can select the title number to play
back by using Function Control screen
(Page 77).
HDD Playback
Other Types of Playback
HDD
• This section explains other types of HDD
playback operations.
Slow Playback
This lets you playback video at slow speed.
1
(Approx. 1/2 x)
Use to fast forward/reverse programmes
being played.
Press JFWD or GREV during
playback.
2
(
(Approx. 8x) (Approx. 32x)
Fast Reverse is Approx. 2x)
Fast Forward
• When you select
Playback (Forward only) you can
enjoy audio together with video
(Rapid play).
2
Press |PLAY to cancel the
search.
• Search will be cancelled and
playback screen is displayed.
• You cannot fast forward or fast
reverse from one title and continue to
another title (except audio CD).
• In the case of HDD, when you fast
forward to the end of the title,
playback will stop.
Skipping to Next or Start of
Current Chapter (Track)
You can skip the chapter using this function.
Press Kor Lduring playback.
• Press Lto go to the start of the next
chapter.
• Press Konce to return to the start of
current chapter (track). If you press it again
(within about 5 seconds), it will skip to the
beginning of the previous chapter (track).
• This function does not work during Time
Shift Viewing.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
(Approx. 1/8 x) (Approx. 1/16 x)
Press |PLAY to return to normal
playback.
• You cannot perform slow playback
over a boundary between titles. At
the end of the title, slow playback will
stop.
Example: When JFWD is pressed
• The search speed will cycle as
follows each time you press the
button.
(Approx. 1.5x)
SLOW during playback.
• The slow playback speed will cycle
as follows each time you press the
button.
Fast Forward/Reverse
(Search)
1
Press
Still Picture Playback/
Frame Advance Playback
This feature enables still playback and frame
advance playback.
1
Press FSTILL/PAUSE during
playback.
• Playback pauses.
• |PLAY button on the HDD (left) side
blinks during Still Picture Playback.
2
Press Lor Kto advance or
reverse playback image frame by
frame.
• Press Lto advance one frame.
Press Kto reverse one frame.
3
Press |PLAY to return to normal
playback.
Skip Search
This lets you skip about 30 seconds ahead.
This is convenient when you want to skip
commercials while viewing.
Press SKIP SEARCH during playback.
Replay
This lets you skip about 10 seconds back.
This is convenient for replaying a short scene
you missed.
Press REPLAY during playback.
• Playback reverses approximately 10
seconds, then starts again.
HDD Playback
4
Switching Audio
Example: Repeat playback of a title
(TITLE)
You can change the audio output channel
during HDD playback.
Each time AUDIO (under the cover) is
pressed, the audio channels change.
• The way audio channels change differs
depending on the sound recorded on HDD.
See the table on page 109 for details.
NOTE
• When you play a programme recorded in
stereo or monaural, and if you are listening
to the BIT STREAM sound via the digital
output jack, you cannot select the audio
channel. Set “DGTL AUDIO OUT SET” to
“PCM” (see page 112), or if you want to
change the audio channel, listen via the
analogue output jacks.
Repeat Playback of a Title
or Chapter (Repeat Playback)
1
2
3
5
1
Press
(INPUT) during
playback.
2
Press \ / | to select “SPECIFY
THE PART”, then press SET/
ENTER.
3
Press SET/ENTER when you
reach the scene you want to start
Repeat Playback.
• The start point of the part (A) will be
memorized.
SELECT REPEAT PLAYBACK TYPE.
Press \ / | to select the type of
Repeat Playback.
SELECT REPEAT PLAYBACK TYPE.
PLAYING BACK TITLE
PLAYING BACK CHAP
\ | SELECT
SPECIFY THE PART
ENTER
• Press RETURN to cancel without
setting the type of Repeat Playback.
Press
(INPUT) to return to
normal playback.
Partial Repeat Playback
(Repeat Playback of a
Specified Part)
(INPUT).
• PLAYING BACK TITLE: Repeats the
title currently playing back.
• PLAYING BACK CHAP: Repeats the
chapter currently playing back.
• SPECIFY THE PART: Repeats the
specified scene of title or chapter.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
TITLE REPEAT
Play back the title or chapter you
want to repeat.
Press
Press SET/ENTER.
PLAYING BACK TITLE
PLAYING BACK CHAP
SPECIFY THE PART
SET START POINT
4
Press SET/ENTER when you
reach the scene you want to end
Repeat Playback.
• The end point of the part (B) will be
memorized and the Repeat Playback
for the specified part (A-B) starts.
5
Press
(INPUT) to return to
normal playback.
NOTE
• For Partial Repeat Playback, set the start
and end points within the same title.
DVD/CD Playback
This section explains playback of DVD-RW/R
discs recorded with this Recorder, commercially available DVD Video discs (like movies)
and CDs.
• To playback a DVD-RW/R recorded with
this Recorder, select the title to be played
back, and then start playback.
• Display the list of initial images (thumbnails) for each title, and select a title. (REC
LIST)
4
1
TF1
21 / 5
2
5
Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the
disc tray.
6
Load a disc on the disc tray.
60 m. SP
1
2
NEW
NEW
ENTER
ENTER
CHAPTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
FUNCTION MENU
Press SET/ENTER or |PLAY.
• Playback will begin from the selected
title (chapter).
• |PLAY button on the DVD (right) side
of Recorder is lit green during
playback.
OPEN/CLOSE
3
PR 1 SP
SAT 10 : 00PM
SELECT
TITLE LIST
Press OPERATE to turn the
power on.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
DVD REMAIN: XP
0h30m
REC. LIST(DVD: ORIGINAL)
Loading Disc
1
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title (or chapter) you wish to view.
To stop playback, press ■STOP/
LIVE.
To Record a Chapter Marker
during Playback
Press CHAPTER MARK.
• Insert the disc with the label face up.
• In case of disc recorded on both
sides, face down the side to play
back.
4
Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the
disc tray.
Playback from REC LIST
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
1
DVD-R
Press DVD to select DVD mode.
• The DVD mode indicator in the front
panel display appears.
• HDD mode is selected automatically
when the power is turned on.
CHANGED TO DVD/CD MODE.
2
3
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Load the disc you want to play
back.
Press REC LIST to display the
“REC LIST” screen.
• See page 66 for details on how to use
the REC LIST.
• If the loaded disc has a play list and
you press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST, the
screen will switch to the play list
(page 88).
• The message “RECORDED CHAPTER
MARKER.” is displayed, and the chapter
marker is recorded.
• Chapter markers can be set during
playback only with DVD-RW (VR mode).
• Chapter markers cannot be set manually
for DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD-R or
during Simultaneous Recording/Playback.
NOTE
• If a title name was set with another DVD
recorder, and it contains characters which
cannot be displayed with this Recorder,
then “****....” is displayed (up to 64
characters max.).
• If you play back a play list on a disc
recorded with another DVD recorder and 1
title is 12 hours or more in length, only 12
hours of that title will be played back.
DVD/CD Playback
DVD-RW (Video format)
/DVD-R Playback
Playback from beginning
1
Press DVD to select DVD mode.
• The DVD mode indicator in the front
panel display appears.
• HDD mode is selected automatically
when the power is turned on.
2
3
Load a disc recorded in Video
mode.
Press |PLAY.
• Playback begins from title 1.
Playback by Selecting Title
• To play back a disc recorded and finalised
in Video mode, press DVD TOP MENU,
display the TITLE LIST screen, and select a
title to play back.
DVD-RW
DVD-R
VIDEO MODE
1
Press DVD to select DVD mode.
• The DVD mode indicator in the front
panel display appears.
• HDD mode is selected automatically
when the power is turned on.
2
3
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
• If you press |PLAY next, playback will
resume from the point where it stopped the
previous time. To playback from the
beginning, cancel resume mode by
pressing ■STOP/LIVE then press |PLAY.
(This may not work depending on the type
of disc. In such a case, open the disc tray,
turn the power off, or switch to HDD.)
DVD Video Playback
Press DVD TOP MENU.
DVD VIDEO
Press ' / " to select the title.
Press SET/ENTER.
• Playback of the selected title will
begin.
6
Resume playback function
Load a disc recorded in Video
mode.
• The TITLE LIST screen is displayed.
• If the title menu does not appear,
once press |PLAY and ■STOP/
LIVE, then press DVD TOP MENU
again.
4
5
NOTE
• If a disc recorded in Video mode has been
finalised (pages 15, 96), a menu screen will
be created automatically to enable
playback with other DVD players. For that
reason, the menu screen is different before
and after finalisation.
• If a title name was set with another DVD
recorder, and it contains characters which
cannot be displayed with this Recorder,
then “****....” is displayed (up to 64
characters max.).
If there is a timer programme which is set
to record on DVD:
• A message to that effect will be displayed 5
minutes prior to the start of the timer
recording. If that happens, stop DVD
playback and load the disc for recording.
• The timer recording will be cancelled at the
start time of the timer recording if DVD
playback is still in progress.
To stop playback, press ■STOP/
LIVE.
1
Press DVD and load a disc.
• The DVD mode indicator in the front
panel display appears.
• Playback may begin automatically,
depending on the disc.
2
Press |PLAY.
• Playback begins from the first title.
• The menu may be displayed first,
depending on the disc. Perform
playback operation by following the
directions on the screen.
• To stop playback, press
■STOP/LIVE.
DVD/CD Playback
Audio CD/Video CD Playback
Other Types of Playback
VIDEO CD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
AUDIO CD
Preparation
Press DVD and load a disc.
• The DVD mode indicator in the front
panel display appears.
Playback from the beginning
1
Press |PLAY.
• Playback begins from the first track.
2
To stop playback, press ■STOP/
LIVE.
Playback by selecting the
track
1
1 Press DIRECT.
• DIRECT does not work when playing
back a video CD with PBC on.
2 Select the track number to be
played back using the Number
buttons, then press SET/
ENTER.
• Playback starts from the selected
track.
Example: To select the 12th song
(track), press 1, then 2.
• You can also select the track by
pressing ' / " .
2
To stop playback, press ■STOP/
LIVE.
Video CD (with PBC) Playback
• Some video CD discs have Playback
Control (PBC) function which guides the
playback by the menu displayed.
Video CD (with PBC)
If you press |PLAY after you load a disc, the
menu is displayed. The functions of button
changes in the following manner during the
playback operation using the menu.
• Lbecomes the “NEXT” button.
• Kbecomes the “PREVIOUS” button.
Select the track number to be played back
from the menu using the Number buttons and
play back the track.
Example: To select the 5th track, press 0,
then 5.
(Operation method may differ depending on
the disc. Refer to the manual of the video
CD.)
Turning off PBC function when playing
back a PBC compatible video CD
Playback begins from track 1 when JFWD
is pressed before the menu is displayed after
you load a disc. Playback will follow the track
order like an audio CD.
* If you want to turn the PBC to “ON” when
playing back the CD with PBC off, press
■STOP/LIVE twice and then press |PLAY
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals to display the menu.
DVD-R
DVD VIDEO
VIDEO CD
AUDIO CD
• This section explains other types of DVD
playback operations.
• For operation common with HDD, see also
pages 67 and 68.
Fast Forward/Reverse
(Search)
Fast Forward/Reverse functions when
JFWD or GREV is pressed during
playback.
Example: When JFWD is pressed
• The search speed will cycle as follows
each time you press the button.
When playing back a DVD
(Approx. 1.5x)
(
(Approx. 8x) (Approx. 32x)
Fast Reverse is Approx. 2x)
• When you select
Fast Forward
Playback (Forward only) you can enjoy
audio together with video (Rapid play).
When playing back a video CD or audio
CD
(Approx. 1.5x)
(
(Approx. 8x)
Fast Reverse is Approx. 2x)
• You can hear audio during fast forward and
fast reverse of an audio CD, but not of a
video CD.
• You cannot fast forward or fast reverse from
one title and continue to another title
(except audio CD).
• In the case of HDD, when you fast forward
to the end of the title, playback will stop.
DVD/CD Playback
Skipping to Next or Start of
Current Chapter (Track)
Skipping (to the beginning of a chapter or
track) functions when Lor Kis
pressed during playback.
• Press Lto go to the start of the next
chapter.
• Press Konce to return to the start of
current chapter (track). If you press it again
(within about 5 seconds), it will skip to the
beginning of the previous chapter (track).
• This function does not work during Time
Shift Viewing.
Repeat Playback of a Title
or Chapter (Repeat Playback)
1
2
3
(INPUT).
Press
Press \ / | to select the type of
Repeat Playback.
• PLAYING BACK TITLE: Repeats the
title currently played back.
• PLAYING BACK CHAP: Repeats the
chapter currently played back.
• SPECIFY THE PART: Repeats the
specified scene of title or chapter.
Slow Playback
Slow Playback functions when
pressed during playback.
Play back the title or chapter you
want to repeat.
SLOW is
SELECT REPEAT PLAYBACK TYPE.
(Approx. 1/2 x)
PLAYING BACK TITLE
(Approx. 1/8 x) (Approx. 1/16 x)
• This doesn’t work for audio CD.
• Press |PLAY to return to normal playback.
Still Picture Playback/
Frame Advance Playback
• Still Picture Playback functions when
FSTILL/PAUSE is pressed during
playback. (If you are playing back an audio
CD, the CD will pause.)
• Frame Advance/Reverse Playback
functions when Lor Kis pressed
during Still Picture Playback.
• Frame Reverse Playback will not work with
Video CD discs.
• |PLAY button on the DVD (right) side of
the Recorder blinks during Still Picture
Playback.
• Frame Advance/Reverse Playback may not
function property with discs other than DVD
-RW(VR format).
• Some DVD Video discs cannot perform Still
Picture Playback /Frame Advance Playback.
Skip Search
SPECIFY THE PART
• Press RETURN to cancel without
setting the type of Repeat Playback.
• For Audio CD, you can select “Disc
Repeat” “Track Repeat” and “Partial
Repeat” as Repeat Playback options.
4
Press SET/ENTER.
Example: Repeat playback of a title
(TITLE)
TITLE REPEAT
5
Press
(INPUT) to return to
normal playback.
Partial Repeat Playback
(Repeat Playback of a
Specified Part)
1
Press
(INPUT) during
playback.
2
Press \ / | to select “SPECIFY
THE PART”, then press SET/
ENTER.
Playback skips 30 seconds ahead when
SKIP SEARCH is pressed during playback.
Replay
SELECT REPEAT PLAYBACK TYPE.
PLAYING BACK TITLE
PLAYING BACK CHAP
SPECIFY THE PART
SET START POINT
Playback reverses 10 seconds when
REPLAY is pressed during playback.
Playback by Selecting a
Title (Track) Number (Direct
Playback)
PLAYING BACK CHAP
3
Press SET/ENTER when you
reach the scene you want to start
Repeat Playback.
• The start point of the part (A) will be
memorized.
Press DIRECT, then select title (track) number
to play back. See page 66for details.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Continued on Next Page |||
DVD/CD Playback
4
Press SET/ENTER when you
reach the scene you want to end
Repeat Playback.
• The end point of the part (B) will be
memorized and the Repeat Playback
for the specified part (A-B) starts.
5
•
•
•
•
•
Press
(INPUT) to return to
normal playback.
NOTE
For Partial Repeat Playback, set the start and
end points within the same title.
Repeat Playback will not work during PBC playback
of a video CD with PBC (Playback Control).
Repeat Playback may be forbidden
depending on the disc.
“Specify the part” Repeat Playback may not
work in multi-angle scenes.
If you press ON SCREEN, you can confirm
the situation of Repeat Playback.
Function Control
You can do such things as specifying a title or
chapter, and adjusting settings for video and
audio, if you press FUNCTION (under the cover)
during playback. (For details see page 77)
Switching Audio
You can change the audio output channel
using the AUDIO button (under the cover).
Each time AUDIO is pressed, the
audio channels change as follows:
AUDIO CD
Switching Subtitles
DVD VIDEO
If subtitles are provided in multiple languages, you can switch between them.
1
Press SUBTITLE (under the
cover) during playback.
• The display indicates the subtitle
number currently being played back,
and the subtitles appear.
Each time SUBTITLE is pressed, the
subtitle changes.
• “– –” is displayed if a disc has no
subtitles.
• You can also select “OFF”.
Switching Angle
DVD VIDEO
If multiple angles are recorded, you can
switch between them.
Press ANGLE (under the cover)
during playback.
• The display indicates the angle number
currently being played back. Each time you
press this button, the angle switches.
• “– –” is displayed if a disc is recorded with
only one angle.
VID.
1
VIDEO CD
L+R
L
R
To return to the previous angle, press ANGLE
(under the cover) a few times to select the
original angle.
DVD VIDEO
The sound number which is currently played
back will be displayed.
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
When bilingual broadcast is recorded:
Switches between “L” “R” and “L+R”.
When Stereo or Monaural broadcast is
recorded:
“Stereo” is displayed. (Audio cannot be
switched.)
NOTE
• When you play a programme recorded in
stereo or monaural, and if you are listening
to the BITSTREAM sound via the digital
output jack, you cannot select the audio
channel. Set “DGTL AUDIO OUTPUT SET”
to “PCM” (page 112), or if you want to
change the audio channel, listen via the
analogue output jacks.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
To display Angle Mark
You can change settings so that Angle Mark
appears in the right bottom part of the screen
when multiple angles are recorded. The
settings can be changed in “START MENU” “OTHER SETTINGS” - “VIEW/PLAY SET” “DVD PLAYBACK SETTING” - “ANGLE MARK
DISPLAY”. (Page 107)
NOTE
• Settings for audio, subtitle and angle can be
changed also in Function Control Screen
(Page 77).
• The operation of subtitle, angle and audio
differ according to each disc. See also
operation manual of the disc.
• The following operations will not work when
playing back an audio CD:
Slow Playback, Frame Advance/Reverse
Display of functions
• The display for subtitle, angle or audio
automatically disappears after 5 seconds.
DVD/CD Playback
Switching between functions
• You can switch subtitle, angle and audio at
the Function Control screen (page 77).
• Operation for each function varies depending on the disc. See the manual for the disc.
Fast Forward/Reverse
• You cannot perform Fast Forward/Fast
Reverse over a boundary between titles. At
the end or beginning of the title, Fast
Forward/Fast Reverse will be cancelled
and normal playback will be selected
automatically.
• Audio is not played back during Fast
Fast
Forward and Fast Reverse except
Forward Playback (Approx. 1.5x).
• Subtitles are not played back with DVD
video discs and video CDs during Fast
Forward and Fast Reverse.
• Depending on the disc and the scene
being played back, the Recorder may not
operate at the speed listed in this manual
when performing Fast Forward.
Slow Playback
• You cannot perform Slow Playback over a
boundary between titles. At the end of the title,
Slow Playback will be cancelled and normal
playback will be selected automatically.
Repeat Playback
• Repeat Playback will not work during PBC
playback of a video CD with PBC (Playback Control).
• Repeat Playback may be forbidden
depending on the disc.
• “Specify the part” Repeat Playback may
not work in multi-angle scenes.
• For “Specify the part” Repeat Playback, set
the start and end points within the same title.
Playback by Selecting a
Title from the Top Menu
Bilingual broadcast
• In the following cases, the audio cannot be
switched even if bilingual broadcast is
recorded. (Only the audio selected in
“BILINGUAL SETTING” (Page 104) is
recorded.)
- When recorded to DVD-RW (Video format)
- When recorded to DVD-R
- When recorded to HDD with “HI SP DUB
SETTING” set as “YES”.
Using the Disc Menu
Playback by Selecting
with the Menu in the DVD
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD VIDEO
1
• The top menu screen is displayed.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title, then press SET/ENTER.
• The selected title is played back.
T I T L E MENU
1
Jazz
2
Latin
3
Classic
4
Rock
NOTE
• The procedure explained on this page is
the basic operation procedure. Procedures
vary depending on the DVD video disc, so
operate by following the instructions in the
DVD video disc manual, or the instructions
displayed on the screen.
• A top menu is not displayed for a DVD-RW/
R (Video mode) if it has not been finalised.
Top menu
• With some DVD discs, the top menu may
be explained using the name “Title Menu”.
For the button explained as the title menu
key, use DVD TOP MENU on the remote
control.
• If no title menu is available, the top menu
will not display even if DVD TOP MENU is
pressed.
Example: Select “SUBTITLE LANGUAGE”.
1
Press DVD MENU.
• The disc menu screen is displayed.
MENU
1 AUDIO LANGUAGE
2 SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
3 AUDIO
2
Press ' / " to select “SUBTITLE
LANGUAGE”.
3
Press SET/ENTER.
• Screen to select subtitle language is
displayed.
VIDEO MODE
• This section explains how to play back a
DVD video disc with a top menu or disc
menu.
• Titles listed in the top menu, and a disc
guide (for options like subtitles and audio
languages) are given in the disc menu.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Press DVD TOP MENU.
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
1
2
3
English
Español
Français
4
Press ' / " to select the subtitle
language.
5
Press SET/ENTER.
MP3/WMA File Playback
CD-R
CD-RW
MP3 WMA
MP3 WMA
NOTE
• See page 11 for details about the MP3 file
format.
• See page 12 for details about the WMA file
format.
1
2
Press DVD to select DVD mode.
Load an MP3/WMA recorded CD-R
or the CD-RW, then press DVD
MENU.
To Play Another File
(music title) during
Playback
1
Press ■STOP/LIVE to stop
playback.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the file
(music title) you want to play, then
press SET/ENTER.
• The chosen file (music title) will be
played.
CD
MP3
1 / 4
1 CARNIVAL
2
AUTUMN I
3
4
BLUES FO
I LOVE Y
To Skip the File during
Playback
Press Kor L.
• Press Lto skip forward.
• Press Kto skip backward.
3
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
folder you want to play, then press
SET/ENTER.
• The file (music title) in the folder is
displayed on the file selection screen.
CD
MP3
1 / 15
00:00:00
CARNIVAL
1
TOO YOUN
2
ANDROMED
3
MAINSTRE
4
THE BAY
5
PULSAR
6
QUEST FO
7
BEACH BA
8
COVABIEN
9
NEW YORK
10
KING OF
• Press RETURN to return to the folder
selection screen.
• If you press |PLAY after selecting
the folder, the playback screen is
displayed, and the files in that folder
will be played from the beginning
repeatedly.
4
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the file
(music title) you want to play and
then press SET/ENTER.
• Playback will start from the selected
file (music title).
CD
MP3
CARNIVAL
5
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
1 / 15
0 0 : 00 : 11
TOO YOUN
ANDROMED
MAINSTRE
THE BAY
PULSAR
QUEST FO
BEACH BA
COVABIEN
NEW YORK
KING OF
Press ■STOP/LIVE to stop
playback.
While the MP3/WMA disc is playing
• Time Search is disabled.
• Programmed Playback is disabled.
• It is possible to repeat one track by
pressing
(INPUT).
• Dolby Virtual Surround does not operate.
JPEG File Playback
CD-R
JPEG
CD-RW
JPEG
NOTE
• This Recorder can play still images (JPEG
files) that have been recorded on CD-RW/R
discs. For details on the still images that
you can play using this Recorder, refer to
“About JPEG file format” on page 11.
• During “Normal play”, still images are
played one by one while during “Slide
show”, they are automatically replaced one
after another.
Playing back still images
in sequence
1
Load the disc containing the still
images, and press |PLAY.
• The first still image appears on the
screen.
• Press Kor Lto proceed to
the next or previous still image.
2
To stop the still image playback at
any time, press ■STOP/LIVE.
NOTE
• You cannot copy still images onto HDD.
• JPEG images cannot be played back while
recording onto HDD.
• When programmed recording onto HDD is
started during JPEG play, JPEG play stops,
and the programmed recording is executed.
Playing back still images
in a selected folder
1
Load the disc containing still
images, and press DVD MENU or
DVD TOP MENU.
• The folder selection screen appears.
2
Use ' / " / \ / | to select the
folder whose still images are to be
played, and press SET/ENTER.
• The still images inside the selected
folder are displayed.
• Press RETURN if you wish to return to
the folder selection screen.
3
4
Press Kor Lto replace
one image with another.
To stop the still image play at any
time, press ■STOP/LIVE.
Play back Slide Show
1
In Step 2 of the above “Playing
back still images in a selected
folder”, press Blue (D) (SLIDE
SHOW).
• The still images inside the selected
folder are played as a slide show.
2
To pause the playback at any time,
press FSTILL/PAUSE.
• Press |PLAY to resume playback.
3
To stop the play at any time, press
■STOP/LIVE.
• The display returns to the TV broadcast screen.
• Press DVD MENU or DVD TOP
MENU to play a slide show of still
images in another folder.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Settings During Playback
Function Control Operation
Procedure
Function Control
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
DVD VIDEO
This lets you make various settings at once,
like subtitle and angle setting, and title
selection for Direct Playback.
Depending on your preferences, you can
adjust video and enjoy audio with a greater
sense of presence. Operation is the same for
HDD and DVD.
1
Press FUNCTION (under the
cover) during playback.
• The Function Control screen is
displayed on the TV.
DVD VIDEO
1/3
5 / 25
00 : 20 : 30
2 ENGLISH
1
1
5 . 1ch
OFF
OFF
OFF
Function Control screen
DVD VIDEO
1
1/3
5 / 25
00 : 20 : 30
2 ENGLISH
1
1
5 . 1ch
OFF
OFF
OFF
BIT RATE
0
5
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
3
n
BIT RATE
0
5
2
SELECT
2
ENTER
n
Mbps
4
Mbps
Press ' / " to select setting
items, then press SET/ENTER.
DVD VIDEO
1 Playback status display
Shows the operation status and the drive or
disc type.
1/3
5 / 25
00 : 20 : 30
2 ENGLISH
1
1
5 . 1ch
OFF
OFF
OFF
2 Setting items
Selects a title or chapter for playback, or
performs video/audio settings.
BIT RATE
0
5
SELECT
3 Operation guide display
Provides help on how to operate with the
remote control buttons.
4 Bit rate display
Displays the data rate of the video appearing
on the TV screen.
10
RETURN
• For a description of each setting item,
see “Functions which can be set”
(page 78).
10
RETURN
ENTER
3
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
10
Mbps
Press ' / " / \ / | to set, then
press SET/ENTER.
• Operation may vary depending on
the setting item. Operate by following
the operation guide instructions on
the screen.
4
Press RETURN or FUNCTION
(under the cover) to close the
Function Control screen.
NOTE
• If “– –” is displayed for an option like title
number or subtitles, the disc has no titles
or subtitles which can be selected.
• If you set to the Function Control screen
during playback of a DVD video, it may be
impossible to operate according to the
instructions from the DVD video. In cases
like this, operate again after cancelling the
Function Control screen.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Settings During Playback
Functions which can be set
Title Number (Direct Title Skip)
• Shows the title number being played back. You can
skip to the start of the title.
• To skip to the start of a selected title, press Number
buttons to enter the title number when this option is
highlighted.
Chapter Number (Direct Chapter Skip)
• Shows the chapter number being played back. You
can skip to the start of the chapter.
• To skip to the start of a selected chapter, press
Number buttons to enter the chapter number when
this option is highlighted.
Playback Elapsed Time (Direct Time
Skip)
• Shows the elapsed time from the beginning of the disc
to the present.
This lets you skip based on time.
• Press \ / | to move to the field of Hour, Minute,
Second, then press ' / " to set the time. Press
SET/ENTER to start playback from that set time.
• You can use the Number buttons to set the time.
Subtitle Language
• Shows the currently selected subtitle language.
If subtitles are provided in other languages, you can
switch to your preferred language.
Angle Number
• Shows the currently selected angle number.
If the video is recorded with multiple angles, you can
switch the angle.
Audio
• Shows the currently selected type of audio.
You can select the desired type of audio.
Digital Super Picture
• Emphasizes and enhances definition of details and
contours in the video. This reduces noise and makes
video easier to see.
• Press ' / " to select “ON” or “OFF”, then press \ / |
to set the level. Then press SET/ENTER.
• There is one setting level on the “soft” side and 3
setting levels on the “sharp” side.
• If you want to enjoy a more defined picture (with
detailed pictures), press | while “ON” is displayed for
Digital Super Picture. For old movies or videos with a
lot of noise, you can reduce noise for an easier to see
picture by pressing \ while “ON” is displayed for
Digital Super Picture.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
DNR
• When you feel that the noise of the currently playing
movie is annoying, activate this function to reduce it. It
is recommended to set this “on” when you play back
long recordings (e.g., ones recorded in EP or LP
mode) and to set this “off” when you play back discs
with little noise such as DVD-Video.
Dolby Virtual Surround
• Lets you enjoy surround audio via analogue connection with a stereo type (2ch) TV or audio equipment.
• This Recorder uses a Spatializer System* for Dolby
Digital Surround.
* Certain audio features of this product manufactured
under a license from Desper Products, Inc.
Spatializer ® N-2-2™ and the circle-in-square device
are trademarks owned by Desper Products, Inc.
• If audio recorded monaurally is played back with
Dolby Virtual Surround ON, the function will not work.
• When this Recorder is connect to an MD recorder to
record a CD to an MD, if Dolby Virtual Surround is set
to “ON”, song numbers will not be assigned to the MD.
When recording a CD onto an MD, set the Dolby
Virtual Surround to “OFF”.
• Dolby Virtual Surround will not work in the following
cases:
– While watching a TV broadcast or external input.
– Multi-karaoke audio from a karaoke disc, 96 kHz 24bit linear PCM audio, or DTS audio.
• If you set Dolby Virtual Surround to “ON” and audio
sounds funny during playback, set it to “OFF”.
• There are no level settings.
NOTE
• These functions may not work with all discs.
Simultaneous Recording/Playback Function
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
VIDEO CD
DVD-R
DVD VIDEO
Plays back from HDD, DVD or CD while
recording a programme onto HDD.
Chasing Playback
Viewing the Programme
Being Recorded from
the Beginning while
Recording to HDD
1
Press G REV or
during recording.
Press G REV or J FWD
during Chasing Playback.
• Each time you press the buttons, the
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback
speed changes as shown below.
• The DVD mode indicator in the front
panel display appears.
2
Fast Forward
Playback (Forward only) you can
enjoy audio together with video
(Rapid play).
Example: When J FWD is pressed
once
Fast Forward Playback 1.5x icon
3
Press ■STOP/LIVE to return to
the live broadcast which is being
recorded.
• Press REC STOP to stop recording to
HDD while continuing DVD playback.
Playing Back a Title on
the HDD during DVD
Recording
1
2
• Press REC STOP to watch normal
playback.
• For details on Chasing Playback, see
pages 36, 37.
• You can enjoy Chasing Playback also
by pressing PAUSE/REPLAY/REV.
• Chasing Playback stops when “Copy
Never” programme emerges or
Chasing Playback continues for 12
hours. To resume playback, perform
“Resume Playback” from Rec List.
Simultaneous Recording/
Playback
DVD/CD Playback durDownloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals ing HDD Recording
Press |PLAY to play back the
title in the HDD.
Viewing Another
Programme Recorded
on HDD while Recording to HDD
1
Press REC LIST during recording.
• The REC LIST (list of recorded
programmes) is displayed.
• Press | PLAY to return to the normal
playback speed.
Press ■STOP/LIVE to return to
the live broadcast which is being
recorded.
Press HDD during DVD recording.
• The HDD mode indicator in the front
panel display appears.
2
3
Load a DVD or CD, then press
|PLAY.
• You can watch/listen to a DVD/CD
while continuing recording to HDD.
(Approx. 1.5x) (Approx. 8x) (Approx. 32x)
(
Fast Reverse is Approx. 2x)
• When you select
Press DVD during HDD recording.
(SKIP)
• The programme being recorded will
play back from the beginning.
2
1
AUDIO CD
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
programme you want to watch,
then press SET/ENTER.
• For details on REC LIST operation,
see page 65.
3
Press ■STOP/LIVE to return to
the live broadcast which is being
recorded.
• Press REC STOP to watch normal
playback.
NOTE
• Recording to HDD continues even while
playing back another programme on the
HDD or a DVD/CD.
• ■STOP/LIVE is the button for stopping
playback. Recording will not stop. To stop
recording, press REC STOP.
• You cannot play back a DVD-RW/R while
recording to that same DVD-RW/R.
• You cannot start recording during playback
from HDD, DVD or CD.
• During Simultaneous Record/Playback, the
recording conditions may have an effect
on playback, but recording will still be done
correctly.
Function Menu
How to Use the
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
The following is the example of HDD. Actual
menu items differ according to each type of
media (HDD, DVD-RW or DVD-R) and
whether Original or Play List.
If you press Blue (D) in the “REC LIST”, you
can use such functions as follows (Function
Menu):
• “PLAYBACK”
• “ERASE”
• “EDIT”
• “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” (cancel setting for
High Speed Dubbing Priority)
• “CHANGE TITLE NAME”
• “TITLE PROTECT SET” (enable/disable to
edit or erase the title)
Example: cancel High
Speed Dubbing Priority
1
Press REC LIST or select
(“REC LIST”) in “START MENU”
screen.
• The “REC LIST” screen is displayed.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title you wish to cancel High
Speed Dubbing Priority setting
for.
3
Press Blue(D).
• The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
4
Press ' / " to select “HI SP DUB
PRIORITY”, then press SET/
ENTER.
5
Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
• Select “NO” if you do not wish to
cancel High Speed Dubbing Priority
setting.
The Following functions can be used in
the Function Menu. For details of each
operation, see the relevant pages.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
REC LIST (HDD: ORIGINAL)
2
PR 2 XP
France 2
25 / 5 WED 10 : 00
PLAYBACK (Pages 65 and 70)
Plays back a title (chapter) selected in the
Rec List. This is the same as pressing
PLAY in the Rec List.
ERASE (Page 95)
Erases a title (chapter) selected in the Rec
List.
EDIT (Page 82)
Edits titles (original/play list) in various
ways such as “Erase Scene”, “Change
Thumbnail”, “Divide Chapter”, “Combine
Chapters”, etc.
HIGH SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY
(Pages 59 and 104)
Cancels High Speed Dubbing Priority
setting for the title recorded with “HI SP
DUB SETTING” set to “YES”. When this is
cancelled, limitations during editing are
relaxed, but the original state cannot be
restored.
CHANGE TITLE NAME (Page 93)
Changes the title name freely. If you give
an easily identifiable name to the title, it
will be convenient when you play it back.
TITLE PROTECT SET (Page 94)
Protects the title so that it cannot be edited
or erased mistakenly.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
60 m. XP
CLOCK
SETTING
PLAYBACK
ERASE
EDIT
HI SP DUB PRIORITY
CHANGE TITLE NAME
TITLE PROTECT SET
CANCEL HI SPEED DUBBING
FOR THIS TITLE? xIONCE CANCELLED
IT CANNOT BE RESET AGAIN.
YES
SELECT
6
ENTER
ENTER
NO
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
Press EXIT to quit FUNCTION
MENU.
Editing (HDD/DVD)
Cans and Cannots of Editing by
Recording Format on HDD/DVD
DVD
VR format Video format
HDD
DIVIDE CHAPTER
✕
✕
-
ERASE SCENE
EDITING PLAYLIST
✕
✕
✕
✕
-
EDITING BY FRAME
✕*
✕
-
SEAMLESS PLAYBACK
✕
✕
-
* Titles recorded with “HI SP DUB SETTING” set as “YES”
cannot be edited by frame. If you are to edit a title by
frame, set “HI SP DUB SETTING” as “NO” prior to
recording of the title.
Editing Procedure
Basic procedure for editing an original title
recorded in VR mode
Load a disc.
Select the title to be edited, and edit.
• Erasing Unnecessary Scenes from an Original Title
(ERASE SCENE) (page 83).
• Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) (page
85).
• Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER) (page
86).
• Combining Chapters Together (COMBINE CHAPTERS)
(page 87).
Basic procedure for editing titles recorded in VR
mode after making a Play List
About Editing
Load a disc.
Content that can be edited and editing operations vary
according to the recording mode.
Recordings on HDD, or on DVD-RW in
VR mode
You can do various types of editing with this Recorder alone.
For example it is possible to create a compilation of your
favourite videos by gathering your favourite scenes from
recorded titles, moving scenes within a specified range, or
erasing unnecessary scenes. You can edit original videos
you have recorded into a Play List without changing the
content of the original videos.
ORIGINAL
• A recorded video (title) in as is form is called an ORIGINAL. A single recording (from record start to stop) forms a
single title.
PLAY LIST
• A title created by editing based on originals is called a
PLAY LIST. A play list can be remade any number of
times.
Original
A
B
C
C6
C5
A1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
1 (All of C above)
1
2
3
A1 A2
2 (A part of A )
C1 C2
C3
C4
B1
A2
B2
B3
B1 B2 B3
3 (A part of B )
PLAY Played back
LIST in the order of 1 2 3
NOTE
• A Play List is a list which describes the playback sequence of originals, and it does not actually copy the
originals. This makes it possible to perform editing while
using only a little disc space.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Create a Play List.
• Creating from Original Titles (page 88).
• Creating from Part of an Original (page 88).
Select and edit the created Play List.
• Adding a Scene from an Original to a Play List (ADD
SCENE) (page 89).
• Changing the Title Sequence (MOVE TITLE) (page 91).
• Erasing Unnecessary Scenes (ERASE SCENE) (page
92).
• Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) (page
92).
• Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER) (page
92).
• Combining Chapters Together (COMBINE CHAPTERS)
(page 92).
NOTE
Editing cannot be done in the following cases.
• Play Lists cannot be created for discs recorded in Video
mode.
• Play Lists cannot be created for recordings on DVD-R.
• DVD-RWs with Disc Protection set cannot be edited.
Note the following when editing titles.
• When you perform editing like adding a chapter marker or
erasing a scene, a slight discrepancy may arise between
the “EDIT” screen and actually edited video.
• If you play back a disc edited at the frame level with
another DVD recorder, there may be a shift in the start or
end point, or the screen may show a different thumbnail.
During Editing, you cannot start the GUIDE Plus+ System by
pressing GUIDE.
Editing (HDD/DVD)
Edit Screen
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP 20h00m
EDITING (HDD: ORIGINAL)
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
Chapter
being edited
60 m. SP
1
1
00 : 00: 01
01
Time being
edited
SPECIFY RANGE TO DELETE. [START POINT SET]
PLAY
PLAYBACK
ENTER
SET START POINT
RETURN
Title being
edited
EXIT
EXIT
Switching between
Original and Play List
(Play Lists can be created only
for HDD or VR mode)
Switching when HDD/DVD
screen is displayed
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST in the
stopped state. Each time this button is
pressed, the setting will toggle between
ORIGINAL and PLAY LIST.
Frame being
edited
• There is no frame display for titles recorded
(dubbed) with high speed dubbing priority,
or for titles recorded (dubbed) in Video
mode.
• In the frame display, “00” is displayed
except in the case of “Still Picture Playback”, “Frame Advance Playback” or
“Frame Reverse Playback”.
REMAIN 20h0m
LIVE
DVD-RW
VR OR IG IN AL
X P REMAIN 1h0m
1 /1
1 /1
HD D
OR IG IN AL
X P REMAIN 20h0m
10
10
LIVE
• To display this screen, press ON SCREEN.
Seamless Playback
This enables smooth playback at the
transitions between edited video scenes.
(However, a shift of about one second may
arise at the transitions, and part of the scene
may not appear.)
NOTE
• If recording is done while switched to play
list, the system will automatically switch
back to original.
Switching at the REC LIST
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST at the REC
LIST. Each time this button is pressed,
the setting will toggle between ORIGINAL
and PLAY LIST.
High Speed Dubbing Priority
If a title is recorded onto HDD using high
speed dubbing priority, editing cannot be
done at the frame level. To perform editing at
the frame level, set “HI SP DUB SETTING” to
“NO” (pages 59 and 104).
• Set this function by displaying “REC LIST”
and then selecting in order of: pressing
Blue (D) (FUNCTION MENU) → “HI SP
DUB PRIORITY”.
• If you have recorded a title with “HI SP
DUB SETTING” set to “YES”, and you want
to edit that title in frame units, cancel “HI
SP DUB SETTING” (page 80).
You cannot set “HI SP DUB SETTING” to
the title again once you cancel.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
DVD REMAIN: XP
0h30m
REC. LIST(DVD ORIGINAL)
1
TF1
21 / 5
PR 1 SP
60 m. SP
SAT 10 : 00
1
2
NEW
NEW
SELECT
TITLE LIST
ENTER
ENTER
CHAPTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
FUNCTION MENU
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)
HDD
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
REC LIST (HDD: ORIGINAL)
Erasing Unnecessary
Scenes from an Original
Title (ERASE SCENE)
1
TF1
21 / 5
PR 1 SP
60 m. SP
SAT 10 : 00
1
2
NEW
NEW
DVD-RW
4
3
5
6
VR MODE
Selects a scene from an original video and
erase it.
• To erase all titles, see page 95.
• To erase by title (or chapter), see page 95.
• Read the explanation on page 81 and 82
before starting editing.
NOTE
• You cannot set a range shorter than 3
seconds.
• Once you erase a section of an original, it
is completely erased. It cannot be restored,
so be very careful and confirm before
erasing.
• Scenes cannot be erased on DVD-RW/R
(Video mode) discs.
• Scenes can only be erased a maximum of
50 times per title in the case of VR format.
• You cannot erase more than one scene in
one operation.
• If scenes have been added 51 or more
times to a disc using another DVD recorder.
Editing (Recording) may not function.
• If a scene erased from the original title is
included in a play list, it will also be erased
in the play list. (In such a case, the chapter
marker in the play list may shift.)
SELECT
TITLE LIST
ENTER
4
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
PLAYBACK
ERASE
EDIT
HI SP DUB PRIORITY
CHANGE TITLE NAME
TITLE PROTECT SET
6
Press ' / " to select “ERASE
SCENE”, then press SET/ENTER.
• The selected title is paused.
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
3
EXIT
EXIT
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title to edit, then press Blue (D)
(FUNCTION MENU).
• To select a title in the title list, press
Red (A).
60 m. SP
1
1
00 : 00: 01
01
SPECIFY RANGE TO DELETE. [START POINT SET]
8
RETURN
22 / 7 [FRI]10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: ORIGINAL)
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(REC LIST), then press SET/
ENTER.
n
NO
Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
2
ENTER
EDIT THIS TITLE?
5
7
ENTER
60 m. SP
YES
Press START MENU to display
“START MENU” screen.
SELECT
EXIT
FUNCTION MENU
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
REC LIST (HDD: ORIGINAL)
1
DISPLAYS THE RECORDED PROGRAM AS A TABLE. AND THEN PLAY BACK/EDIT, ETC.
EXIT
Press ' / " to select “EDIT”, then
press SET/ENTER.
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
22 / 7 [FRI]10 : 10
RETURN
• Function Menu Screen appears.
Before Starting Editing
START MENU [REC LIST]
ENTER
CHAPTER
Press |PLAY to start playback.
• Find the scene to be erased using
JFWD, GREV, FSTILL/PAUSE,
K, L, or SLOW.
Press SET/ENTER when you
reach the scene to be erased.
• The erase start point is set. (Title
playback continues.)
• To edit frame by frame, press
FSTILL/PAUSE at the erase start
point. Then press
or
for
“Frame Advance Playback” or “Frame
Reverse Playback”.
• During JFWD or GREV, press
|PLAY and then SET/ENTER.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 15
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: ORIGINAL)
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
60 m. SP
1
1
00 : 05: 01
01
SPECIFY RANGE TO DELETE. [END POINT SET]
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Continued on Next Page |||
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)
• When the start point is set to near the
beginning of a chapter, the beginning
of the chapter will be selected as the
start point. To make the original
designated start point effective, set it
again after combining up with the
chapter just before. (Page 87)
9
Press SET/ENTER when you
reach the end of scene to be
erased.
• The erase end point is set. (The title
will pause.)
• As the erase end point, you can not
select a point which precedes the
erase start point.
• To edit frame by frame, press
FSTILL/PAUSE at the erase start
point. Then press
or
for
“Frame Advance Playback” or “Frame
Reverse Playback”.
• During JFWD or GREV, press
|PLAY and then SET/ENTER.
22 / 7 [FRI]10 : 20
EDITING (HDD: ORIGINAL)
HDD REMAIN: XP
1
20h00m
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
60 m. SP
1
1
00 : 10: 32
01
ERASE SCENE?
YES
n
NO
RETURN
• When the end point is set to near the
end of a chapter, the end of the
chapter will be selected as the end
point. To make the original designated end point effective, set it again
after combining up with the chapter
just after. (Page 87)
10 Press Green (B) (CONFIRMING)
to confirm the contents.
• The title is played back without the
scene to be erased.
• Go to Step 11.
11 Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
• Erasure begins.
When erasure is completed, the
screen in Step 6 appears.
• If “C (UNDO)” is displayed, you can
undo edit by pressing Yellow (C).
• To quit scene erase, press RETURN.
Then the edit screen appears.
12 Press EXIT to exit from Edit
mode.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Searching for the Start
Point and End Point Scenes
The following playback operations are
available when searching for the start point
and end point scenes.
Playback
• If you press |PLAY, the currently paused
title will be played back.
Skipping to the start of a chapter
• If the scene to be selected is in another title
or chapter, first search for the title or
chapter using Kor L.
Searching for scenes in a chapter
• GREV and JFWD are convenient for
searching for a scene in a chapter.
Pause
• When you reach a scene near the start
point or end point, press FSTILL/PAUSE
to pause. This will make it easier to find the
scene. The start and end points may shift
slightly.
Frame Advance/Reverse
• If you press Lafter pause, the video
will start Frame Advance Playback. If you
press K, it will start Frame Reverse
Playback.
Final selection of scene
• To select a scene more accurately, use
slow playback starting a little before the
scene to be selected. This will keep you
from going beyond the scene.
If you press SLOW after pausing, you
can select a scene at your leisure during
slow playback of the video.
• When you select the start and end points
by using K, Lor SLOW buttons,
the actual points may not exactly correspond to the selected points.
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)
Changing Thumbnail
(CHANGE THUMBNAIL)
HDD
6
1 Press ' / " to select
“CHANGE THUMBNAIL”.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: ORIGINAL)
DVD-RW
1
VR MODE
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
Changes the still frame picture displayed at
the Thumbnail screen of the REC LIST to your
favourite scene within the title.
60 m. SP
1
1
00 : 00: 01
01
SPECIFY SCREEN TO CHANGE. [CHANGE POINT SET]
Before Starting Editing
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
1
2
2 Press SET/ENTER.
7
Press |PLAY to start playback.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 15
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: ORIGINAL)
Press START MENU.
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(“REC LIST”), then press SET/
ENTER.
60 m. SP
1
1
00 : 05: 01
01
SPECIFY SCREEN TO CHANGE. [CHANGE POINT SET]
START MENU [REC LIST]
22 / 7 [FRI]10 : 10
• Find the scene you want to use as a
thumbnail using JFWD, GREV,
FSTILL/PAUSE, K, L, or
SLOW.
DISPLAYS THE RECORDED PROGRAM AS A TABLE. AND THEN PLAY BACK/EDIT, ETC.
8
SELECT
3
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
EXIT
• Playback is paused.
• During JFWD or GREV, press
|PLAY and then SET/ENTER.
EXIT
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title to edit, then press Blue (D)
(FUNCTION MENU).
1
TF1
21 / 5
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
60 m. SP
1
2
60 m. SP
1
1
00 : 10: 32
01
NEW
NEW
CHANGE THUMBNAIL TO THIS SCREEN?
3
5
ENTER
YES
9
6
ENTER
CHAPTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
FUNCTION MENU
• Function Menu screen appears.
Press ' / " to select “EDIT”, then
press SET/ENTER.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
REC LIST (HDD: ORIGINAL)
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
PLAYBACK
ERASE
EDIT
HI SP DUB PRIORITY
CHANGE TITLE NAME
TITLE PROTECT SET
60 m. SP
SELECT
ENTER
NO
RETURN
1 If this is the screen you want,
select “YES” by pressing \ / |.
• If you select “NO”, you can return to
Step 6 and select the scene again.
2 Press SET/ENTER.
• The new Thumbnail screen is set, and
the system returns to the screen in
Step 6.
Press Yellow (C) (UNDO) to
return to the previously set
thumbnail.
10 Press EXIT to quit Thumbnail
EDIT THIS TITLE?
ENTER
NO
• Operate according to the instructions
of the screen.
YES
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
PR 1 SP
PR 1 SP
SELECT
TITLE LIST
5
1
22 / 7 [FRI]10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
SAT 10 : 00
4
4
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 20
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: ORIGINAL)
• To select a title in the title list, press
Red (A).
REC LIST (HDD: ORIGINAL)
Press SET/ENTER when you
reach the scene you want to use
as a thumbnail.
EXIT
EXIT
Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
edit.
• Edit mode will terminate.
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)
Making Sections in a Title
(DIVIDE CHAPTER)
HDD
5
Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
6
Press ' / " to select “DIVIDE
CHAPTER”, then press
SET/ENTER.
DVD-RW
VR MODE
Divides a title into multiple chapters and
makes finding of scenes, editing and
dubbing of chapter as unit easier.
1
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
1
2
7
1
1
00 : 00: 01
01
Press |PLAY to start playback.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 15
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: ORIGINAL)
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(“REC LIST”), then press SET/
ENTER.
60 m. SP
1
1
00 : 05: 01
01
SELECT POSITION TO DIVIDE. [DEVIDE POINT SET]
• Find the scene to divide the title using
JFWD, GREV, FSTILL/PAUSE,
K, L, or SLOW on the
remote control.
22 / 7 [FRI]10 : 10
DISPLAYS THE RECORDED PROGRAM AS A TABLE. AND THEN PLAY BACK/EDIT, ETC.
8
3
60 m. SP
SELECT POSITION TO DIVIDE. [DIVIDE POINT SET]
Press START MENU.
START MENU [REC LIST]
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
• You can set chapter divisions by pressing
CHAPTER MARK during recording or
playback.
Before Starting Editing
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: ORIGINAL)
Press SET/ENTER at the point
where you want to divide.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 15
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: ORIGINAL)
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title to edit, then press Blue (D)
(FUNCTION MENU).
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
• To select a title in the title list, press
Red (A).
60 m. SP
1
1
00 : 05: 01
01
DIVIDE CHAPTER?
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
REC LIST (HDD: ORIGINAL)
1
TF1
21 / 5
YES
PR 1 SP
• During JFWD or GREV, press
|PLAY and then SET/ENTER.
60 m. SP
SAT 10 : 00
1
2
NEW
NEW
4
3
9
5
NO
6
Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
• To continue dividing, repeat Steps 6
to 8.
4
Press ' / " to select “EDIT”,
then press SET/ENTER.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
REC LIST (HDD: ORIGINAL)
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
PLAYBACK
ERASE
EDIT
HI SP DUB PRIORITY
CHANGE TITLE NAME
TITLE PROTECT SET
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
60 m. SP
EDIT THIS TITLE?
To cancel a chapter division,
press Yellow (C) (UNDO).
• Operate according to the instructions
on the screen.
10 Press EXIT to quit editing.
• Edit mode will terminate.
NOTE
• Divide a chapter to make it 3 or more
seconds. You cannot divide a chapter into a
section which is less than 3 seconds.
• When there are 999 chapters, you can not
add another chapter.
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)
Combining Chapters
Together
(COMBINE CHAPTERS)
HDD
DVD-RW
VR MODE
Combines up to 10 adjacent chapters into a
single chapter.
NOTE
• You cannot combine chapters automatically recorded when a scene was erased.
Before Starting Editing
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
1
Select
(“REC LIST”) in
“START MENU” screen, then
press SET/ENTER.
• To select a title in the title list, press
Red (A).
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title you wish to edit.
3
Press Blue (D) (FUNCTION
MENU).
4
Press ' / " to select “EDIT”, then
press SET/ENTER.
5
Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
6
Press ' / " to select “COMBINE
CHAPTERS”, then press SET/
ENTER.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: ORIGINAL)
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
SELECT
7
ENTER
60 m. SP
COMBINE CHAPTERS IN TITLES.
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
1 Using ' / " / \ / | and SET/
ENTER, select two or more
consecutive chapters which
you want to combine together.
• To cancel, press EXIT.
2 Press Blue (D) to complete the
procedure.
• If you want to combine chapters
more, repeat Step 7.
8
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Press EXIT to exit from Edit
mode.
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)
Creating a Play List
HDD
4
1 Press ' / " to select “COPY
TITLE/CHAPTER”.
2 Press SET/ENTER.
5
1 Press ' / " / \ / | to select title
to copy.
DVD-RW
VR MODE
You can create a Play List by copying a title
or chapter units from an original. Also you can
select your favourite scenes from originals,
and compile them into a Play List.
HDD REMAIN: XP
1
NOTE
• Operations like “COPY TITLE/CHAPTER”
and “COPY SPECIFIED SCENE” do not
actually copy the original titles. These
operations merely write the information
“make this original title a title in the play
list”. Therefore, you can edit without
decreasing free space in the disc or
touching the original titles.
• When creating a play list from original titles,
the original title’s thumbnail and chapter
mark information are not copied.
Creating from Original
Titles or Chapters
Makes one or more original title(s) or
chapter(s) into a play list title.
1
Select
(“REC LIST”) in
“START MENU” screen, then
press SET/ENTER.
• To select a title in the title list, press
Red (A).
2
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to
display the “PLAY LIST” screen.
• The screen switches to the Play List
Edit Screen.
• When there is no title yet, a “NEW”
title frame with no image is displayed.
• To create a new Play List later, select
the “NEW” title frame.
HDD REMAIN: XP
NEW
NEW
3
5
6
2 Press SET/ENTER.
• The selected title (chapter) becomes
a Play List title.
• Repeat 1 and 2 to include more
titles in the Play List.
3 Press EXIT to exit from EDIT
mode.
Creating from Parts of
an Original
You can select a desired scene from an
original title, and make it into a Play List title.
1
Perform Steps 1-3 of “Creating
from Original Titles or Chapters”
in the left column.
2
1 Press ' / " to select
“SPECIFY SCENE TO COPY”.
2 Press SET/ENTER.
3
Press ' / " / \ / | to select title to
copy, then press SET/ENTER.
4
Press |PLAY to start playback.
• Find the scene to copy using
FSTILL/PAUSE, JFWD, GREW,
K, L, or SLOW.
• During JFWD or GREV, press
|PLAY and then SET/ENTER.
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
“NEW” and press SET/ENTER.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
CREATE NEW PLAYLIST.
SPECIFY RANGE TO CREATE
NEW PLAYLIST FROM ORIGINAL.
COPY TITLE/CHAPTER
SELECT ORIGINAL TITLE/CHAPTER AND ADD IT.
SPECIFY SCENE TO COPY
SELECT A SCENE FROM ORIGINAL VIDEO AND
ADD IT.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 15
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: PLAYLIST)
20h00m
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
CREATE NEW
NEW
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
2
4
CREATE NEW PLAYLIST?
EDITING (HDD: PLAYLIST)
60 m. SP
SAT 10 : 00
1
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
REC. LIST (HDD: PLAYLIST)
3
20h00m
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
Before Starting Editing
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
EDITING (HDD: ORIGINAL)
60 m. SP
1
1
00 : 05: 01
01
SPECIFY A RANGE TO COPY. [START POINT SET]
5
Press SET/ENTER at the place
where you want to start copying.
• As the copy end point, you can not
select a point which precedes the
copy start point.
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)
• When the start point is set to near the
beginning of a chapter, the beginning
of the chapter will be selected as the
start point. To make the original
designated start point effective, set it
again after combining up with the
chapter just before. (page 87)
6
Adding a Scene from an
Original to a Play List
(ADD SCENE)
HDD
VR MODE
Adds video selected from an original to the
end of play list titles.
Find the place where you want to
end copying, then press SET/
ENTER.
• If you press RETURN, you can
reselect the start point.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 20
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: PLAYLIST)
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
CREATE NEW
60 m. SP
1
1
00 : 10: 32
01
NOTE
• The selected scene cannot be added if
adding it will make the title longer than 12
hours.
Before Starting Editing
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
1
SAVE AS A NEW PLAYLIST?
YES
NO
• When the end point is set to near the
end of a chapter, the end of the
chapter will be selected as the end
point. To make the original designated end point effective, set it again
after linking up with the chapter just
before. (page 87)
7
2
Press Green (B) (CONFIRMING)
to confirm the content.
1
1 Press \ / | to select “YES”.
2 Press SET/ENTER.
TF1
21 / 5
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
PR 1 SP
60 m. SP
SAT 10 : 00
1
NEW
3
Press EXIT to exit from EDIT
mode.
NOTE
Selecting start or end point to add a scene.
• You cannot set a range shorter than 3
seconds.
1 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST
to switch to “PLAY LIST”
screen.
2 Press ' / " / \ / | to select title
to edit.
REC LIST (HDD: PLAYLIST)
• One play list title is created.
• To continue with creating a play list,
repeat Steps 3 to 8 above.
9
Select
(“REC LIST”) in
“START MENU” screen, then
press SET/ENTER.
• To select a title in the title list, press
Red (A).
• You can reselect the end point by
pressing RETURN.
8
DVD-RW
2
4
5
3 Press Blue (D) (FUNCTION
MENU).
3
1 Press ' / " to select “EDIT”,
then press SET/ENTER.
2 Press \ / | to select “YES”,
then press SET/ENTER.
4
Press ' / " to select “ADD
SCENE” then press SET/
ENTER.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: PLAYLIST)
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
ADD SCENE
MOVE TITLE
SELECT
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
ENTER
60 m. SP
ADD TITLE/CHAPTER
SELECT ORIGINAL TITLE/CHAPTER AND ADD IT
SPECIFY SCENE TO ADD
SELECT A SCENE FROM ORIGINAL VIDEO AND
ADD IT
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
Continued on Next Page |||
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)
5
Adding a Title or Chapter
1 Select “ADD TITLE/CHAPTER”,
then press SET/ENTER.
2 Select a title (chapter) to add
using ' / " / \ / |, then press
SET/ENTER. Go to Step 9.
• When the start point is set to near the
beginning of a chapter, the beginning
of the chapter will be selected as the
start point. To make the original
designated start point effective, set it
again after combining up with the
chapter just before. (page 87)
8
Specifying and Adding a
Scene
• Press RETURN to reselect the start
point of the scene. You can press
RETURN to reselect the end point
even after it is already set.
• Select “SPECIFY SCENE TO
ADD”, then press SET/ENTER.
Go to Step 6.
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
ADD SCENE
MOVE TITLE
SELECT
6
ADD SCENE?
YES
ADD TITLE/CHAPTER
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
60 m. SP
1
1
00 : 00: 01
01
SPECIFY RANGE TO ADD. [START POINT SET]
1 Press |PLAY to start playback.
• Find the scene to add using FSTILL/
PAUSE, JFWD, GREV, K,
L, or SLOW. (Page 85)
2 Press SET/ENTER at the start
point of the scene you want to
add.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 15
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: PLAYLIST)
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
ADD SCENE
MOVE TITLE
ENTER
CONFIRM
NO
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
• When the end point is set to near the
end of a chapter, the end of the
chapter will be selected as the end
point. To make the original designated end point effective, set it again
after combining up with the chapter
just before. (page 87)
EXIT
Press ' / " / \ / | to select title
(chapter) to edit, then press SET/
ENTER.
1
ENTER
SPECIFY SCENE TO ADD
SELECT A SCENE FROM ORIGINAL VIDEO AND
ADD IT
EDITING (HDD: PLAYLIST)
60 m. SP
1
1
00 : 05: 12
01
SPECIFY RANGE TO ADD. [START POINT SET]
• To edit frame by frame, press
FSTILL/PAUSE at the start point.
Then press
or
for “Frame
Advance Playback” or “Frame
Reverse Playback”.
• During JFWD or GREV, press
|PLAY and then SET/ENTER.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
SELECT
SELECT ORIGINAL TITLE/CHAPTER AND ADD IT
ENTER
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
ADD SCENE
MOVE TITLE
1
1
00 : 00: 32
01
60 m. SP
• The selected title (chapter) pauses.
7
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
COMBINE CHAPTERS
ADD SCENE
MOVE TITLE
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: PLAYLIST)
Press SET/ENTER at the end of
the scene you want to add.
9
Press Green (B) (CONFIRMING)
to confirm the content.
• If you press Green (B) (CONFIRMING), you can test play the added
scene, from the start point to the end
point.
• It may take about one minute for the
confirm screen to appear.
10 1 Press \ / | to select “YES”.
2 Press SET/ENTER.
• “ADD SCENE” is executed.
• The scene is added after the selected
title, and stored as a new title of the
play list.
11 Press EXIT to exit from EDIT
mode.
• A chapter marker is automatically set
at the start point where the scene is
added.
NOTE
• When adding a scene, select a scene
which continues for at least 3 seconds.
Scenes shorter than 3 seconds cannot be
added.
• Scenes can only be added and erased a
maximum of 50 times per title.
• You cannot add more than one scene in
one operation.
• If scenes have been added or erased 51 or
more times to a single title in a disc using
another DVD recorder, Editing (Recording)
may not function.
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)
Changing the Title
Sequence (MOVE TITLE)
HDD
7
Press SET/ENTER.
• If a point prior to the selected title is
selected as the destination, the title
will move to the point immediately
prior to the selected title.
DVD-RW
VR MODE
Example: If Title 3 is selected and the
destination cursor is set to Title 1, Title 3
is moved to the spot in front of Title 1.
• Freely changes the sequence of titles.
• Follow the same procedure both in “title
list” and in “thumbnail”.
22 / 7 [FRI]10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: PLAYLIST)
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
60 m. SP
SAT 10 : 00
1
NEW
PR 4 XP
4
Canal+
30 / 4
2
30 m. XP
SUN 10 : 00
1
3
4
2
5
4
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
5
ENTER
ENTER
Before Starting Editing
EDITING (HDD: PLAYLIST)
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
1
PR 2 XP
France 2
15 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
Select
(“REC LIST”) in
“START MENU” screen, then
press SET/ENTER.
3
4
5
6
2
ENTER
6
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
UNDO
• If a point after the selected title is
selected as the destination, the title
will move to the point immediately
after the selected title.
Example: If Title 3 is selected and the
destination cursor is set to Title 4, Title 3
is moved to the spot after Title 4.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: PLAYLIST)
5
PR 1 EP
France 5
28 / 4 [THU] 10 : 00
30 m. EP
1
2
4
Press ' / " to select “MOVE
TITLE”, then press SET/ENTER.
3
5
SELECT
Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
ENTER
ENTER
6
RETURN
4
Canal+
30 / 4
EXIT
EXIT
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
EDITING (HDD: PLAYLIST)
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
thumbnail to move the title to.
PR 4 XP
30 m. XP
SAT 10 : 00
1
2
3
3
4
4
EXIT
3
5
SELECT
1 Press ' / " to select “EDIT”,
then press SET/ENTER.
2 Press \ / | to select “YES”,
then press SET/ENTER.
2
EXIT
22 / 7 [FRI]10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
4
1 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST
to switch to “PLAY LIST”
screen.
2 Press ' / " / \ / | to select title
to edit.
3 Press Blue (D) (FUNCTION
MENU).
1
RETURN
60 m. XP
1
• To select a title in the title list, press
Red (A).
2
6
EXIT
SELECT
1
3
5
5
6
6
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
UNDO
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
Selected title
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
Cursor on the
thumbnail to move
the selected title to
8
Press EXIT to exit from EDIT
mode.
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)
The operations in this page is in common with those to edit “original” titles.
Erasing Unnecessary
Scenes (ERASE SCENE)
HDD
DVD-RW
Making Sections in a Title
(DIVIDE CHAPTER)
HDD
VR MODE
DVD-RW
VR MODE
Selects and erases unnecessary scenes.
Even if you erase a scene in a play list, this
will not affect the original video.
Divides a title into multiple chapters. This
makes editing and dubbing in chapter units
more convenient.
1
1
Select
(“REC LIST”) in
“START MENU”, then press SET/
ENTER.
• The Thumbnail/Title List screen
appears.
2
3
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to
display “PLAY LIST” screen.
Erase the scene using the same
operation used for erasing an
original scene (Step 3 on page 83Step 12 on page 84).
Changing Thumbnail
(CHANGE THUMBNAIL)
HDD
DVD-RW
VR MODE
Changes the image of title displayed in “REC
LIST” to a scene you like in the title.
1
Select
(“REC LIST”) in
“START MENU”, then press SET/
ENTER.
• The Thumbnail/Title List screen
appears.
2
3
3
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to
display “PLAY LIST” screen.
Change the thumbnail using the
same operation used for changing
an original thumbnail (Steps 3 -10
on page 85).
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to
display “PLAY LIST” screen.
Divide a title into chapters using
the same operation used for
chapter division of originals
(Steps 3 -10 on page 86).
Combining Chapters
Together
(COMBINE CHAPTERS)
HDD
DVD-RW
VR MODE
This lets you combine up to 10 adjacent
chapters into a single chapter.
1
• The Thumbnail/Title List screen
appears.
2
Select
(“REC LIST”) in
“START MENU”, then press SET/
ENTER.
Select
(“REC LIST”) in
“START MENU”, then press SET/
ENTER.
• The Thumbnail/Title List screen
appears.
2
3
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to
display “PLAY LIST” screen.
Combine chapters using the same
operation used for chapter
combination of originals (Steps 2
-8, page 87).
NOTE
• You cannot combine chapters automatically recorded when a scene was erased,
or chapters recorded due to adding (with
ADD SCENE).
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Disc Management
Inputting/Changing Title
Name (CHANGE TITLE
NAME)
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
6
• Title Name Change screen appears.
7
NOTE
• Title names cannot be changed in finalised
Video mode discs.
Input field (Displays title name.
Can input and change title name.)
Cursor (Displays the position
to input characters.)
Displays input characters.
Select when you switch
between capital letters
and small letters.
Before Starting Editing
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
Press START MENU.
A B C D E
À
&
1
2
NEW
NEW
4
SELECT
TITLE LIST
4
5
ENTER
ENTER
CHAPTER
6
RETURN
EXIT
FUNCTION MENU
Press Blue (D) (FUNCTION
MENU).
• Function Menu screen appears.
Press ' / " to select “CHANGE
TITLE NAME”, then press SET/
ENTER.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
REC LIST (HDD: ORIGINAL)
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
PLAYBACK
ERASE
EDIT
HI SP DUB PRIORITY
CHANGE TITLE NAME
TITLE PROTECT SET
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
EXIT
60 m. SP
CHANGE THIS TITLE NAME?
Ã
Ä
Å Æ Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
1
'
2
*
3
4
[
5
6
]
7
8
9
-
+
{
/
\
^
ENTER
BACK
ENTER
ERASE
Ì
!
;
#
Í
Î
Ï
<
=
ß
>
$ %
" _
|
}
˜
i
ERASE ALL
FORWARD
small
END
n
RETURN
SPACE
World Rail
3
5
Â
Ò
?
:
2 Press Red (A) to erase the
character to change.
8
60 m. SP
1
Á
,
)
• When you want to insert characters,
move the cursor to the position you
want to insert by pressing Green (B)
or Yellow (C).
20h00m
PR 1 SP
K L M .
(
1 Press Green (B) or Yellow (C)
to move the cursor.
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
SAT 10 : 00
J
Press ' / " / \ / | to select Select when you
complete inputting
the character to be input.
character.
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title to edit.
TF1
21 / 5
I
Ñ
SELECT
BACK SPACE
DISPLAYS THE RECORDED PROGRAM AS A TABLE. AND THEN PLAY BACK/EDIT, ETC.
HDD REMAIN: XP
F G H
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
REC LIST (HDD: ORIGINAL)
60 m. SP
SAT 10 : 00
MORNING TALK SHOW SP|ECIAL
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(“REC LIST”), then press SET/
ENTER.
START MENU [REC LIST]
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
REC LIST (HDD: ORIGINAL)
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
0
3
Change Title Name.
DVD-R
• When you record, a title name is automatically imported from the GUIDE Plus+
system.
You can freely change this title name.
• You can input up to a maximum of 64
characters.
To input, perform the following steps in
order: “Select characters to be changed”
→ “Delete unnecessary characters
(characters to be changed)” → “Input new
characters”.
1
2
Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
9
3 Press ERASE to erase all the
characters entered.
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
character to input, then press
SET/ENTER.
• Inputs character in input field.
• To switch between capital and small
letters, select “CAPS” or “small”, then
press SET/ENTER.
Input title letters by repeating
Steps 7 and 8.
• Press Red (A) (BACK SPACE) to
erase text to the left of the cursor, a
character at a time.
• Press Green (B) (BACK) to move the
cursor back one space.
• Press Yellow (C) (FORWARD) to
move the cursor forward one space.
• Press Blue (D) (SPACE) to input a space.
• The maximum number of characters
you can input is 64.
Disc Management
10 Press ' / " / \ / | to select “END”
and then press SET/ENTER
After input is finished.
To Cancel Title Protect
1
• The new title is set, and the screen in
Step 5 is displayed.
11 Press EXIT to quit editing.
• Edit mode will terminate.
Disabling Title Edit and
Erase (TITLE PROTECT)
HDD
DVD-RW
2
Select the title protected in Step
2 above, and follow the Steps 3
and 4 above.
Select “NO” in the Step 5 above,
then press SET/ENTER.
NOTE
• If “DISC PROTECT” is set for a DVD-RW (VR
mode) disc, protection cannot be cancelled
for individual titles. Cancel “DISC
PROTECT”.
VR MODE
Disables edit and erase so you cannot
mistakenly change or erase the content of a
title.
Lets you safely save a disc for which editing
is in progress.
• This operation will not work with Video
mode discs.
• Titles created with Play List (page 88)
cannot be protected.
Before Starting Editing
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
1
Select
(“REC LIST”) in
“START MENU” screen, then
press SET/ENTER.
Press EXIT to exit from Edit
mode.
Disabling DVD Disc Edit
and Erase (DISC
PROTECT)
DVD-RW
VR MODE
Disables editing and erasing of the whole
DVD disc to protect all the contents of it from
being changed or erased mistakenly.
Before Starting Editing
• Switch to DVD.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title to protect.
1
3
Press Blue (D) (FUNCTION
MENU).
2
4
Press ' / " to select “TITLE
PROTECT SET”, then press SET/
ENTER.
Press ' / " to select “DISC
PROTECT/UNPROTECT”, then
press SET/ENTER.
3
Press ' / " to select
“PROTECT”, then press SET/
ENTER.
4
Press EXIT to exit from Edit
mode.
5
Press ' / " to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
24 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
HDD REMAIN: XP
20h00m
REC LIST (HDD: ORIGINAL)
1
PR 1 SP
TF1
21 / 5
SAT 10 : 00
CLOCK
SETTING
PLAYBACK
ERASE
EDIT
HI SP DUB PRIORITY
CHANGE TITLE NAME
TITLE PROTECT SET
60 m. SP
PROTECT THIS TITLE?
YES
NO
DISABLE ERASING AND EDITING.
ENABLE ERASING AND EDITING.
• The protect mark
is attached to
protected titles.
(The protect mark can be confirmed
at either the “REC LIST” screen or
“EDIT” screen.)
6
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
3
Press EXIT to exit from Edit
mode.
Select
(“ERASE”) in “START
MENU” screen, then press SET/
ENTER.
To Cancel Title Protect
1
2
Follow the Steps 1 and 2 above.
Select “NOT PROTECT” in the
Step 3 above, then press SET/
ENTER.
Disc Management
Erasing All Titles
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
Erasing by Selecting a
Title (or Chapter)
DVD-R
This erases the entire contents of an HDD or
DVD-RW. (Except titles for which title protect
has been set.)
You can erase the following:
• HDD (ORIGINAL):
Erases all titles recorded on the HDD.
When originals are erased, play lists are
also erased.
• HDD (PLAY LIST):
Erases all play lists created on the HDD.
Even if play lists are erased, the original
titles are not erased.
• DVD (ORIGINAL):
Erases all titles recorded on DVD. When
originals are erased, play lists are also
erased.
• DVD (PLAY LIST):
Erases all play lists created on DVD. Even if
play lists are erased, the original titles are
not erased.
NOTE
• When a Video mode disc is finalised, you
can no longer erase all titles.
HDD
1
Select
(“ERASE”) in “START
MENU” screen, then press SET/
ENTER.
2
Press ' / " to select “ERASE
ALL TITLES”, then press SET/
ENTER.
3
Press ' / " to select what you
want to erase, then press SET/
ENTER.
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
1
Press ' / " to select “ERASE
SELECTED TITLE”, then press
SET/ENTER.
3
Press ' / " / \ / | to select titles
to erase.
• To erase a play list, press ORIGINAL/
PLAYLIST to switch to play list.
• If you press Green (B) (CHAPTER),
the screen will switch to the chapter
thumbnail display so you can select
and erase chapters.
4
5
5
Press SET/ENTER.
• All titles (or play lists) are erased, and
the screen in Step 3 appears.
6
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Press EXIT to exit from Edit
mode.
Press Blue (D) (ERASE).
• All selected titles (chapters) are erased.
• To cancel erase, press Yellow (C).
Operate according to the instructions
on the screen.
Press \ / | to select “YES”.
• Carefully confirm before executing
erase.
• If you select “NO” and enter, the
screen in Step 3 appears.
Press SET/ENTER.
• If there are other titles (chapters) you
wish to erase, select with ' / " / \ / |
and press SET/ENTER.
• If you press SET/ENTER again for the
selected title, the selection will be
cancelled.
DVD (PLAYLIST)
4
Select
(“ERASE”) in “START
MENU” screen, then press SET/
ENTER.
2
HDD (ORIGINAL)
DVD (ORIGINAL)
DVD-R
Before Starting Editing
SELECT AN ITEM TO ERASE.
HDD (PLAYLIST)
VIDEO MODE
NOTE
• Up to a maximum of 20 titles (chapters)
can be selected at one time.
• When a Video mode disc is finalised, you
can no longer select and erase titles.
• You cannot erase chapters in DVD-RW/R
discs (Video mode).
22 / 7 [FRI] 10 : 10
ERASE ALL TITLES
DVD-RW
VR MODE
Allows you to select titles to erase, and erase
them in a batch.
• When erasing original titles:
If original titles are erased, those titles will
also be erased from play lists.
• When erasing play lists:
Even if play lists are erased, the original
titles will not be erased.
Before Starting Editing
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
DVD-RW
6
Press EXIT to exit from Edit mode.
NOTE
• If a scene erased from the original title is
included in a play list, it will also be erased
in the play list. (In such a case, the chapter
marker in the play list may shift.)
Initialise/Finalise
See also page 15 for information on Initialisation and Finalisation.
Initialisation
Before recording to DVD-RW, initialise the disc in VR mode
or Video mode.
You can also initialise the HDD. Initialise the HDD only after
dubbing important recordings onto DVD-RW/R disc(s).
Finalisation
Finalisation is done so that a recorded DVD-RW/R disc can
be played back with other recorders.
DVD FINALISE
DVD INITIALISE (VR)
• When recording with a DVD-RW in VR mode, initialise in
VR mode before you start recording.
(When you initialise, all of the recorded content of the disc
is erased. Before initialising, check the content of the disc
so that you do not erase any content you need.)
• You cannot initialise if “DISC PROTECT” is set to
“PROTECT”. (page 94)
DVD INITIALISE (VIDEO)
• When recording with a DVD-RW disc in Video mode,
initialise in Video mode before you start recording.
(When you initialise, all of the recorded content of the disc
is erased. Before initialising, check the content of the disc
so that you do not erase any content you need.)
• You cannot initialise a DVD-R disc.
INITIALISE HARD DISC
• If an HDD error message is displayed, or if you wish to
return the HDD to the state it was in when the Recorder
was purchased, initialise the HDD. All recorded video will
be erased. (If you use the “ERASE ALL TITLES” function
to erase the titles, protected titles will remain, but if you
use the HDD initialising function, all titles will be erased.)
Dub any important recordings to DVD-RW/R disc(s)
before initialising the HDD.
NOTE
• After “INITIALISE HARD DISC” is completed, the power
goes off automatically.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
• Set this when you want to playback a VR mode or Video
mode disc using another recorder capable of playback.
If you finalise a recording on DVD-R disc, you will not be
able to record any more on the disc. (If you undo
finalisation on DVD-RW, you will be able to record on it
again. On the other hand, you can not undo finalisation
on DVD-R discs.)
• Finalisation can take anywhere from a few minutes to one
hour.
During finalisation, all types of operation are disabled
(including turning off power and removing the disc).
• Do not unplug the power cord during finalisation. Doing
so may make the disc unusable.
UNDO DVD FINALISE
• This resets a finalised DVD-RW disc so you can record on
it again.
Initialise/Finalise
Basic Operation for
INITIALISE/FINALISE
4
• The message asks “OK”?
2 Press \ / | to select “YES”,
then press SET/ENTER.
Example: Initialising DVD in VR mode
1
• Initialising (or finalising) will be
executed.
1 Press START MENU to
display “START MENU” screen.
2 Press ' / " / \ / | to select
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
INITIALISE
DVD INITIALISE (VR)
DVD INITIALISE (VIDEO)
INITIALISE HARD DISC
(“INITIALISE/FINALISE”),
then press SET/ENTER.
START MENU [INITIALISE/FINALISE]
1 Press \ / | to select “YES”,
then press SET/ENTER.
INITIALISING...
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
DO NOT RESET OR TURN OFF THE POWER
WHILE INITIALISING. IT MAY CAUSE PROBLEMS.
INITIALISES HDD/DVD AND FINALISES DVD
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
INITIALISE
SELECT
2
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
EXIT
DVD INITIALISE (VR)
DVD INITIALISE (VIDEO)
INITIALISE HARD DISC
EXIT
INITIALISING COMPLETED.
Press ' / " to select
“INITIALISE”, then press SET/
ENTER.
INITIALISE/FINALISE [INITIALISE]
INITIALISE
OK
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
ENTER
ENTER
• Initialising (or finalising) will be
completed.
FORMAT NEW DISC OR RECORDED DISC.
(ALL RECORDED CONTENTS WILL BE DELETED.)
3 Press SET/ENTER.
DVD FINALISE
3
PROCESSES DVD DISC SO THAT
OTHER DVD PLAYERS CAN PLAY BACK.
Press ' / " to select “DVD
INITIALISE (VR)”, then press SET/
ENTER.
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
INITIALISE
DVD INITIALISE (VR)
DVD INITIALISE (VIDEO)
INITIALISE HARD DISC
IN VR MODE, YOU CAN ENJOY A VARIETY OF
EDITING FUNCTIONS ON THIS UNIT
AFTER RECORDING. INITIALISE?
YES
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
NO
• Screen in Step 3 appears.
5
Press EXIT to exit from
“INITIALISE/FINALISE” screen.
NOTE
• Finalisation processing will take anywhere
from a few minutes to about an hour.
(Processing will take time if there is a lot of
empty space or if there are many titles on
the DVD disc.)
Enjoying High Quality Sounds
Playing 2 Channel Audio with an
Analogue Connection
The Recorder
(Red)
(White)
To AUDIO
Output jacks
Audio cable
(commercially available)
(Red)
(White)
Playing Dolby Digital,
DTS or MPEG Audio with a
Digital Connection
• Connecting an amplifier with a Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG
Audio digital surround processor or a Dolby Digital/DTS/
MPEG Audio digital surround amplifier to the Recorder’s
coaxial or optical DIGITAL AUDIO Output jack (terminal)*
provides richer, more powerful audio play.
• To enjoy DTS Digital Surround audio, select DTS audio at
the disc menu during DVD playback, or select DTS audio
using the AUDIO button (under the cover) of the remote
control.
■ Connection to a processor or amplifier with an optical
or coaxial digital input jack (terminal)*
The Recorder
To amplifier
audio input jacks
DIGITAL AUDIO Output
COAXIAL jack
Audio equipment, etc.
Jack and Plug Colours
Audio Left: White
Audio Right: Red
NOTE
• When connecting audio equipment using analogue
connection, we recommend that you set “DVD AUDIO
OUT LEVEL” to “NO” (see page 112).
If you set to “YES”, audio may sound abnormal during
disc playback.
To DIGITAL
AUDIO Output
OPTICAL terminal
To DIGITAL
AUDIO Output
COAXIAL jack
or
Coaxial digital cable
(commercially available)
To coaxial digital
input jack
Optical digital cable
(commercially available)
To optical digital
input terminal
* DV-HR480F/
DV-HR450F only
Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG
Audio processor or amplifier
Important!
• When using this connection, set the applicable type of
signal (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) in “DGTL AUDIO
OUT SET” to “BITSTREAM” (see page 112).
NOTE
• For bilingual broadcast or playback of titles that recorded
bilingual broadcast, digital audio output cannot be
switched. (If the processor or amplifier has digital audio
output switching function, switch from the end of the
audio equipment.)
• When playing back DVD video recorded with 96 kHz
(LPCM) audio format, output audio is down-converted to
48 kHz.
• To play a disc recorded with DTS, you need to use DTS
processor or amplifier.
• This connection is not possible if the processor or
amplifier to which you want to connect does not have an
optical or coaxial digital input jack (terminal).
• Refer to the operation manual for the processor or
amplifier for information about connecting to it.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Enjoying High Quality Sounds
Playing 2 Channel Audio with a
Digital Connection
Digital Connection to an MD Recorder or
Other Audio Equipment without a Dolby
Digital Decoder
Audio CD or Video CD
The Recorder
• You can enjoy these discs by playing them back by the
ordinary playback procedure. (The normal audio output is
not played back for discs recorded with DTS.)
DVD Video Disc
DIGITAL AUDIO Output
COAXIAL jack
To DIGITAL
AUDIO Output
COAXIAL jack
Coaxial digital cable
(commercially available)
To coaxial digital
input jack
To DIGITAL
AUDIO Output
OPTICAL terminal
or
Optical digital cable
(commercially available)
To optical digital
input terminal
* DV-HR480F/
DV-HR450F only
Audio equipment with an
optical* or coaxial digital
input terminal
Important!
• When using this connection, set the applicable type of
signal (Dolby Digital or MPEG) in “DGTL AUDIO OUT
SET” to “PCM” (see page 112). For DTS, PCM is not
applicable.
Digital Connection to an MD Recorder to Record a CD
• It is only the audio equipment with digital input
terminal compatible with sampling frequency of
48kHz that can record digital audio of DVD, TV
broadcast, etc. For example, in the case of MD, only
those with built-in sampling rate converter.
• When you connect the Recorder with an MD
recorder to record Audio CD on an MD, set “Dolby
Virtual Surround” as “OFF”. If you record with “Dolby
Virtual Surround” as “ON”, track numbers will not be
recorded on the MD.
• When the internals between CD tracks is short or you
specify the CD track on the Function Control screen,
the track numbers of the CD may not match the track
numbers recorded to the MD.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
• There is no audio signal generated for DVD video discs
recorded with DTS. A processor or amplifier equipped
with a DTS Surround decoder function is required to enjoy
DTS audio.
Recording from External Equipment
Recording from a Digital
Camcorder Using i.LINK
(DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only)
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
About DV Input
• When this Recorder is connected with a DV-format digital
camcorder using a DV cable, you can record and edit
with minimal deterioration of picture and sound quality
using a digital signal. (DV LINK)
• You can also display an operation panel for digital
camcorder control on the screen, and operate using the
buttons on the panel. This allows easy recording onto
disc. Record after first performing “DV SETTING” (page
101, 113).
• The DV IN terminal of this Recorder only enables input of
DV-format camcorders (DVC-SD signals). It is not
compatible with satellite receivers or Digital VHS video
recorders since they employ a different format.
* i.LINK is a function that lets you control other equipment
by input and output of video, audio, data and control
signals between equipment having an i.LINK terminal.
* i.LINK refers to the IEEE1394-1995 industry specification
logo is used for products
and extensions thereof. The
compliant with the i.LINK standard.
* i.LINK
is a trademark.
Input of Video, Audio and Data
Signals
• Date and time data as well as the contents of cassette
memory cannot be recorded with this Recorder.
• Video and audio signals of protected material or “Copy
Once” material cannot be recorded.
Audio Type Input From Digital
Camcorder
Digital camcorders typically have the following two audio
modes.
16-bit (48 kHz)
Although this yields high sound quality, only one stereo
audio signal can be processed.
12-bit (32 kHz)
Two stereo signals can be processed. In general,
overdubbed audio is recorded in Stereo 2.
• This Recorder allows listening or recording of either
Stereo 1 or Stereo 2 audio if the input audio is in the 12-bit
audio mode.
• This Recorder is unable to process 44.1 kHz input audio
signals.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Notice about Connection
• To connect the Recorder with a digital camcorder, set
digital camcorder POWER to “PLAY (Video side)”, and
connect while in the stopped state. If the DV is connected
when POWER is set to “RECORD (Camera side)”, or
when tape has been played back, the DV LINK will not
work correctly.
• There are some digital camcorders which cannot be
operated using the On-Screen Control Panel of this
Recorder, even if you set “DV LINK SETTING” under “DV
SETTING” to “YES”. In cases like this, set “DV LINK
SETTING” to “NO”. (page 113)
• The signal may not be input to this Recorder depending
on the camcorder. When this happens, use an analogue
connection (page 113).
• The DV IN terminal is not compatible with connection to a
PC.
• This Recorder cannot be controlled from digital
camcorder connected to the DV IN terminal.
• Only one camcorder can be connected to this Recorder
using the DV IN terminal.
• Connect this Recorder and the camcorder directly. The
DV signal will not be input if the camcorder is connected
to this Recorder through other equipment with a DV IN
terminal.
Connecting a Digital
Camcorder Using the DV IN
Terminal (i.LINK)
Refer to the user’s manual provided with the camcorder for
information on the procedure for connecting the camcorder
with this Recorder.
The Recorder
To DV IN terminal
To DV terminal
DV cable
(commercially available)
Before connecting, set the power
switch of the digital camcorder to
“Video (Playback)” and stop the
camcorder.
Digital camcorder
Recording from External Equipment
Settings for Recording
from a Digital Camcorder
(DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F
only)
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
2
1 Press ' / " to select “DV LINK
SETTING”, and then press
SET/ENTER.
2 Press \ / | to select “YES”,
and then press SET/ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS [ADJUSTMENT: DV SETTING]
DV LINK SETTING
DV IN AUDIO SETTING
DV CHAPTER SETTING
DVD-R
OPERATE THE DV CONNECTED DIGITAL
VIDEO CAMERA FROM THIS UNIT?
• The following settings are necessary for
controlling from this Recorder with a digital
camcorder connected to the Recorder via
a DV link to record video/audio playback
by the camcorder. See page 113 for details
of each option.
DV LINK SETTING
Set this to “YES” or “NO” to choose whether
or not you wish to activate the DV link with the
source digital camcorder connected to this
Recorder. When “YES” is selected, in the DV
mode, the DV control panel is displayed on
which you can operate the camcorder using
this Recorder’s remote control unit.
YES
3
DV CHAPTER SETTING
Select an option you want as to how the titles
copied to the Recorder through DV LINK are
divided into chapters.
1
OTHER SETTINGS [ADJUSTMENT: DV SETTING]
OTHER SETTINGS [ADJUSTMENT: DV SETTING]
REC FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SET
ADJUSTMENT
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
CONTROL SET
CLOCK SETTING
AUTO INSTALLATION
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING
DV SETTING
BLUE SCREEN SETTING
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
SELECT
ENTER
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
SELECT AUDIO TYPE TO RECORD FROM DIGITAL
VIDEO CAMERA CONNECTED TO DV TERMINAL.
ENTER
STEREO 1
: ORIGINAL AUDIO
STEREO 2
: DUBBED AUDIO
STEREO 1+2
: ORIGINAL + DUBBED AUDIO
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
2 Press ' / " to select the
desired type of audio, and then
press SET/ENTER.
4
1 Press ' / " to select “DV
CHAPTER SETTING”, and then
press SET/ENTER.
2 Press ' / " to select the
desired option as to how the
title to be copied is divided into
chapters, then press SET/
ENTER.
5
Press EXIT to exit from the
setting screen.
1 In the “START MENU” screen,
select
(“OTHER
SETTINGS”), and then press
SET/ENTER.
2 Press \ / | to select “ADJUSTMENT”.
3 Press ' / " to select “DV
SETTING”, and then press
SET/ENTER.
NO
1 Press ' / " to select “DV IN
AUDIO SETTING”, and then
press SET/ENTER.
DV LINK SETTING
DV IN AUDIO SETTING
DV CHAPTER SETTINGS
DV IN AUDIO SETTING
Set this to “STEREO 1”, “STEREO 2”, or
“STEREO 1 + 2” depending on the type of
audio you wish to record on this Recorder.
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
Recording from External Equipment
Recording from a Digital
Camcorder (DV-HR480F/
DV-HR450F only)
3
Start playback on the digital
camcorder.
• When “DV LINK SETTING” is set to
“YES”, the on-screen control panel
allows you to operate the camcorder.
To specify a function, press ' / " /
\ / | to select the desired button, and
then press SET/ENTER.
• When “DV LINK SETTING” is set to
“NO”, use the operation buttons on
the camcorder.
• Record video/audio playback by the digital
camcorder connected to this Recorder via
a DV LINK.
• The DV control panel displayed on the TV
screen (when “DV LINK SETTING” is set to
“YES”) provides an easy-to-use interface
for operating the digital camcorder.
• Before recording by this method, make
sure you make the “DV LINK SETTING”,
“DV IN AUDIO SETTING” and “DV
CHAPTER SETTING” (page 101,113).
DV control panel
DV LINK (CAN OPERATE CAMCORDER)
NOTE
• Recording of video including a copy guard
signal is not possible.
• Recording is not possible if there is no
signal input from the digital camcorder.
(The REC button does not work.)
• There are some digital camcorders which
cannot be operated using the On-screen
Control Panel, even when “DV LINK
SETTING” is set to “YES”. In such cases,
set it to “NO”. (page 113.)
1
1 Connect the digital camcorder
to the DV IN terminal inside the
front door of the Recorder.
• Before connection, make sure the
operation switch of the camcorder is
set to “VCR (PLAY)” and the
camcorder is in the stop mode.
2 Press HDD or DVD to select
the desired recording drive.
2
Press INPUT to select “DV” (DV
input screen).
• Each time you press the button, the
TV screen changes as follows:
... L1 (IN 1) → L2 (IN 2) → L3 (IN 3)
→ DV (DV IN) → TV broadcast → L1
(IN 1) ...
• The DV control panel is displayed
(when “DV LINK SETTING” is set to
“YES”.).
• When the DV input screen is selected, “DV” appears on the
Recorder’s front panel display.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
00 : 00 : 01
PLAYBACK
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
Select
EXIT
EXIT
To Start Playback.
• The following buttons (functions) are
available on the DV control panel:
Stop, Play, Fast Forward, Rewind,
Pause (Still), Slow Forward, Slow
Reverse, Frame-by-frame Forward,
Frame-by-frame Reverse
• Press EXIT to turn off the DV control
panel. Press ON SCREEN to display
the panel again.
4
Press REC at the point you wish
to start recording.
• The Recorder starts recording.
5
Press REC STOP to stop recording.
NOTE
If any of the following events happens during
recording, abnormal video may be recorded,
and the Recorder will enter the recording
pause mode.
• The connected digital camcorder starts
playback of an unrecorded portion.
• The DV cable is disconnected, or the
digital camcorder's power is turned off.
• Playback on the digital camcorder is
stopped.
Recording from External Equipment
Recording from a Camcorder
(VCR) Using an Analogue
Connection
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
•
•
•
•
•
NOTE
More vivid images can be viewed by connecting the SVIDEO input jack on this Recorder with the S-video output
jack on the camcorder using an S-video cable.
Some camcorders may be required to be connected
using a special cable.
Refer to the operation manual provided with the
camcorder for further information on the procedure for
connecting the camcorder.
Material protected with a copy guard cannot be recorded. It may be impossible to get the correct video,
even if you just view without recording.
Date and time as well as the contents of cassette memory
cannot be recorded with this Recorder.
If you input video from an external device to this Recorder, there will be a slight difference in image quality
between the video viewed from the external device
directly on the TV, and video viewed as external input to
the Recorder.
Example:
To record by connecting a camcorder to the LINE IN 3
jacks.
The Recorder
To VIDEO/AUDIO
input jacks
To S-VIDEO
input jack
S-video cable
(commercially
available)
2
(Yellow: Video,
Red: Right,White: Left)
Video/audio cable
(provided with camcorder or
commercially available)
To video/audio
output jack
To S-video
output jack
Camcorder
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Press HDD or DVD to select the media to
record to.
Select audio to be input from the external
device.
To record to HDD
• Switch audio of the external device to the audio you
want to capture.
To record to DVD
• Select audio using “EXTERNAL IN AUDIO” (page
104).
• Select “L CH” or “R CH” with “BILINGUAL SETTING” (page 104) to record in Video mode.
DVD-R
Material from a camcorder can be recorded with this
Recorder using an analogue connection. You can capture
video by connecting a camcorder, VCR, or external receiver
to the LINE IN 1, 2 or 3 jacks of this Recorder*. (Connection
using the DV terminal of the Recorder is recommended
when connecting the Recorder to the digital camcorder
equipped with the DV terminal.)
* DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only
•
1
3
Press INPUT to set the connection to external input channel (example: L3).
• The setting will cycle as follows each time you press
the button.
L1 (IN 1)
TV channels
L2 (IN 2)
DV (DV IN)*
L3 (IN 3)
* DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only
4
5
Play back the camcorder or VCR.
Press ●REC when you reach the scene you
want to start recording.
• The Recorder starts recording.
6
Press REC PAUSE when you want to pause
recording.
• Press REC PAUSE again to cancel Pause mode.
7
Press REC STOP when you want to stop
(end) recording.
Function Setting
Functions under OTHER SETTINGS
This section explains various settings relating to recording and playback which can be used to get more out of the Recorder.
• For details about each setting, see the corresponding pages.
REC FUNCTION s page 104
VIEW/PLAY SET s page 107
ADJUSTMENT s page 111
CONTROL SET s page 115
REC FUNCTION
REC MODE SETTING
• If you set by selecting one of the 32 picture quality levels for “MN”, recording will be
done at that picture quality when “MN” is selected using REC MODE on the remote
control. For details, see page 43.
32 levels
AUDIO REC TYPE SET (AUDIO REC TYPE SETTING)
• LINEAR PCM: If you record by setting the recording mode to “XP” or “MN32”, you can LINEAR PCM
record audio as PCM (uncompressed) audio which can be played back with 2ch audio Dolby Digital 2ch
equipment.
* This will not work when recording with the recording mode set to anything other than
“XP” or “MN32”.
* Recording is done with a recording mode whose image quality is slightly lower than
XP mode recorded with the “Dolby Digital 2ch” setting.
* When making a PCM recording of bilingual sound, only the audio selected in
“BILINGUAL SETTING” is recorded.
• Dolby Digital 2ch: Records audio as Dolby Digital 2ch audio.
* Dolby® Digital Stereo Creator enables consumers to create stereo DVD-Videos with
stunning Dolby Digital sound tracks at home. The technology, when utilised instead
of PCM recording, also saves recordable disc space, allowing for higher video
resolution or extended recording time on each DVD, DVDs mastered using Dolby
Digital Stereo Creator will play back on all DVD-Video players.
EXTERNAL IN AUDIO (EXTERNAL INPUT AUDIO SETTING)
• This selects audio to be input from an external device.
* Be sure to always select “BILINGUAL” when recording bilingual sound. If you select
“STEREO” when recording, the audio for the left channel (“L CH”) and right channel
(“R CH”) will be heard together during playback.
* When recording bilingual sound, you can switch between the left channel (“L CH”)
and right channel (“R CH”) during playback in VR mode. In Video mode, only the
audio set in “BILINGUAL SETTING” is recorded.
STEREO
BILINGUAL
BILINGUAL SETTING
• This selects whether to record the left channel (“L CH”) or right channel (“R CH”) when
recording (or dubbing) bilingual sound to DVD-RW/R in Video mode or when recording
to HDD with “HI SP DUB SETTING” set as “YES”.
* This does not apply when recording from the DV IN terminal. (DV IN terminal is for
DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only)
L CH
R CH
AUTO CHAPTER SETTING
• This sets the interval of automatic chapter setting during recording.
• Chapter markers set on a DVD-RW/R in Video mode cannot be combined by editing,
so select an appropriate interval.
10 (10 min interval)
15 (15 min interval)
30 (30 min interval)
– – (off)
HI SP DUB SETTING (HIGH SPEED DUBBING SETTING)
• To perform high speed dubbing from the HDD to a DVD in Video mode, set this to
“YES” before recording to the HDD.
• If you wish to edit in frame units, set this to “NO”. For details of “HI SP DUB SETTING”,
refer to page 59.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
YES
NO
Function Setting
REC FUNCTION
ALTERNATIVE REC SET (ALTERNATIVE REC SETTING)
• This function is for switching recording to HDD when you originally set to record to
DVD-RW/R but could not because of the disc situation. This function works in the
following cases.
* 1 When there is not enough disc capacity left in DVD.
2 When an unrecordable disc is loaded.
3 When you forget to load a disc.
4 When a disc is playing within 2 minutes prior to the start of timer recording.
* In case 1, when the remaining capacity of HDD is less than that of DVD, the
recording will continue on to DVD.
YES
NO
DVD AUTO INITIALISE (DVD AUTO INITIALISING SETTING)
• This sets the Recorder so it automatically initialises any unused DVD-RW discs which
are loaded into the Recorder.
You can initialise in either VR mode or Video mode.
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
EXACT REC. SETTING (EXACT RECORDING SETTING)
• This function works when timer recording (GUIDE Plus+/Timer Programme) onto DVDRW/R. If disc capacity runs low, and the programme cannot be recorded to the end,
this function will automatically change the recording mode so the programme will fit.
(The recording mode set in above situation will have lower picture quality than the
originally set recording mode.)
• If there is very little disc capacity left on the disc, the programme may not fit even if
Exact Recording is set.
• When recording in EP or MN1 mode, there is no lower recording mode, so Exact
Recording will not work.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
YES
NO
Function Setting
Basic Operation for
REC FUNCTION Setting
This operation is available in both HDD mode
and DVD mode.
Example: Setting “EXTERNAL IN AUDIO”
under “REC FUNCTION”
1
1 Press START MENU to
display “START MENU” screen.
2 Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(“OTHER SETTINGS”), then
press SET/ENTER.
START MENU [OTHER SETTINGS]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
DISPLAYS SETTINGS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK
2
Press \ / | to select “REC
FUNCTION”.
OTHER SETTINGS [REC FUNCTION]
REC FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SET
ADJUSTMENT
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
CONTROL SET
REC MODE SETTING
AUDIO REC TYPE SET
EXTERNAL IN AUDIO
BILINGUAL SETTING
AUTO CHAPTER SETTING
HI SP DUB SETTING
ALTERNATIVE REC SET
DVD AUTO INITIALISE
EXACT REC. SETTING
3
Press ' / " to select “EXTERNAL
IN AUDIO”, then press SET/
ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS [REC FUNCTION: EXTERNAL IN AUDIO] 24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
REC FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SET
ADJUSTMENT
CONTROL SET
REC MODE SETTING
AUDIO REC TYPE SET
EXTERNAL IN AUDIO
BILINGUAL SETTING
AUTO CHAPTER SETTING
HI SP DUB SETTING
ALTERNATIVE REC SET
DVD AUTO INITIALISE
EXACT REC. SETTING
4
Press \ / | to select the option
you want to set, then press SET/
ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS [REC FUNCTION: EXTERNAL IN AUDIO] 24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
SELECT EXTERNAL AUDIO MODE
WHEN RECORDING FROM THE EQUIPMENT
CONNECTED TO EXTERNAL INPUT 1/2/3.
STEREO
SELECT
5
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
ENTER
ENTER
BILINGUAL
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
Press EXIT to exit from
“EXTERNAL IN AUDIO” screen.
Function Setting
VIEW/PLAY SET
DVD
PLAYBACK
SETTING
PARENTAL CNTRL LEVEL (PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL)
• This lets you set Parental Control Level depending on disc content.
• Level 1 – Level 8
(The smaller the number, the greater the level of restriction.)
• When “PARENTAL CNTRL” is set to “OFF”, DVD discs can be played
back regardless of the parental level.
• Parental Control Level cannot be set if a password has not been set.
OFF, LEVEL:1-8
COUNTRY CODE
* Refer to the Country
Code List below.
DISC LANGUAGE (DISC PRIORITY LANGUAGE)
• This lets you select the language for subtitle, audio and menu
displayed on the screen.
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
MENU
* Refer to the
Language Code
List below.
ANGLE MARK DISPLAY
• This lets you turn “on” or “off” the Angle Mark Display, when DVDVideo recorded with multiple angles is played back. (The Angle Mark
is displayed in the lower right screen.)
YES
NO
Country Code List
USA
CANADA
JAPAN
GERMANY
FRANCE
UK
ITALY
SPAIN
SWISS
SWEDEN
HOLLAND
NORWAY
DENMARK
FINLAND
BELGIUM
HONG KONG
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
MALAYSIA
INDONESIA
TAIWAN
PHILIPPINE
AUSTRALIA
RUSSIA
CHINA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
PT
QU
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
ST
SU
SV
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZH
ZU
Language Code List
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DA
DE
DZ
EL
EN
EO
ES
ET
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
German
Bhutani
Greek
English
Esperanto
Spanish
Estonian
EU
FA
FI
FJ
FO
FR
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IT
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
French
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Italian
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Dutch
Norwegian
Occitan
Afan (Oromo)
Oriya
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Romanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswat
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapük
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Chinese
Zulu
Function Setting
VIEW/PLAY SET
PRESET
• This lets you preset the channels into memory. A maximum of 84
channels can be preset.
1 - 84
MANUAL TUNING*1
CHANNEL SETTING
CHANNEL
• For details, see “CHANNEL SETTING” on page 30.
CHXX
FINE TUNING
• This lets you obtain sharp colour picture.
DECODER
• If there is a separate decoder connected to the L2 terminal of the
Recorder, set this function to “ON” in order to record the unscrambled
signal and/or watch it on your TV.
ON
OFF
SKIP
• This determines whether the channel can be selected when using
CH ' / " instead of Number buttons.
ON
OFF
SYSTEM
• This lets you select the broadcast system (SECAM-L,PAL B/G or PAL D/K)
L
B/G
D/K
DELETE
• This lets you delete a channel from the Recorder memory.
NAME
NICAM*2
• When your Recorder tunes in broadcast channels automatically, it
names them using the VPS/PDC information. The “NAME” function
lets you change the name of the channel.
PROGRESSIVE
OUT SET*3
NICAM
• This recorder can receive and record NICAM or A2 broadcasts.
NICAM broadcasts will be received when “AUTO” is selected in the
NICAM setting. Depending on the received programme, some
NICAM or A2 broadcasts may not be in stereo.
AUTO
OFF
PROGRESSIVE OUT SET (PROGRESSIVE OUTPUT SETTING)
• If this is set as “YES”, conventional (interlaced scan, 625i) image is
converted into progressive scan (625p) when DVD is played back.
• Set this as “NO” if the Recorder is connected to TV which is not
compatible with progressive scan.
• Progressive output does not work unless the Recorder is connected
using a component video cable.
YES
NO
*1 For details, see page 30.
*2 For details, see page 109.
*3 When “RGB” is selected for “L1 OUT” setting, progressive output does not work (Page 111).
Some progressive scan TVs are not fully compatible with the Recorder, which may cause image distortion. In this case,
switch “PROGRESSIVE OUT SET” from “YES” to “NO”.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Function Setting
VIEW/PLAY SET
PIC QUALITY
CONTROL
(PICTURE
QUALITY CONTROL)
PASSWORD
SETTING
BLOCK NOISE REDUCTION
• This reduces MPEG block noise that tends to arise with fast moving
images, typically in recordings by low quality mode such as EP.
ON
OFF
MOSQUITO NOISE REDUCTION
ON
OFF
• This reduces video artifacts on the edge of the image.
PASSWORD
4 digit number
• This sets the password for setting or changing Parental Control Level.
About NICAM/A2
About audio selection
This Recorder can receive and record NICAM
or A2 broadcasts. NICAM broadcasts will be
received when “AUTO” is selected in the
NICAM setting. Depending on the received
programme, some NICAM or A2 broadcasts
may not be in stereo.
The monitor output listed in the table shows
the audio output mode. The contents of audio
recording are different between VR mode and
Video mode. See the tables below for details.
About audio recording
NICAM/A2
STEREO
NICAM/A2
BILINGUAL
NICAM/A2
MONO
EXTERNAL IN
AUDIO
BILINGUAL
SETTING
STEREO
BILINGUAL
L
BILINGUAL
R
STEREO
R
L
R
NICAM
MONO
MONO
STEREO
(Except NICAM) L R
NICAM
STEREO
NICAM
I/II
NICAM
I/II
NICAM
I/II
NICAM
L
R
LR
L
R
LR
L
R
L
L
L
R
R
R
–
MONO MONO
STEREO L R
L
R
I/II
LR
L
R
I/II
L
L
L
I/II
R
R
R
–
–
MONO MONO
L
R
L
R
MONO
(Except NICAM) MONO
L
R
L
R
* Audio mode is selected with the AUDIO button on the
remote control.
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
L
L
R
R
R
MONO MONO MONO MONO
MONO MONO MONO MONO
· When making LPCM recording of bilingual sound, only
the audio selected in “BILINGUAL SETTING” is
recorded.
· When recording audio in the LPCM format with the
recording mode set to “XP” or “MN32”, audio is recorded
in the same format as recorded to DVD-RW/R disc in
Video mode.
· When a disc recorded in monaural audio is playback,
monaural audio is played back even though “STEREO”
is displayed on the screen.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
LR
R
MONO MONO MONO MONO
BILINGUAL
L
BILINGUAL
R
LR
LR
BILINGUAL
(Except
L
NICAM)
R
RECORDING AUDIO
VR MODE VIDEO MODE
R
L
L
R
L
BILINGUAL
L
BILINGUAL
R
STEREO
NICAM
STEREO
Audio
Output
Audio Mode* Display of Display of
Displayed Broadcast Audio
on Screen Received Received
NICAM
BILINGUAL L
NICAM Broadcast
Broadcast
Broadcast
Function Setting
OTHER SETTINGS [VIEW/PLAY SET: DVD PLAYBACK SETTING] 24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
Basic Operation for
VIEW/PLAY SET
PARENTAL CNTRL LEVEL
DISC LANGAUGE
ANGLE MARK DISPLAY
SET PARENTAL CONTROL
FOR DVD VIDEO.
SET PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL.
This operation is available in both HDD mode
and DVD mode.
OFF
SET THE COUNTRY CODE.
GERMANY
Example: Setting “DVD PLAYBACK SETTING” under “VIEW/PLAY SET”
1
SELECT
1 Press START MENU to
display “START MENU” screen.
2 Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(“OTHER SETTINGS”), then
press SET/ENTER.
START MENU [OTHER SETTINGS]
2
Press \ / | to select “VIEW/PLAY
SET”.
OTHER SETTINGS [VIEW/PLAY SET]
REC FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SET
ADJUSTMENT
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
CONTROL SET
DVD PLAYBACK SETTING
CHANNEL SETTING
PROGRESSIVE OUT SET
PIC QUALITY CONTROL
PASSWORD SETTING
3
Press ' / " to select “DVD
PLAYBACK SETTING”, then press
SET/ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS [VIEW/PLAY SET: DVD PLAYBACK SETTING] 24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
REC FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SET
ADJUSTMENT
CONTROL SET
DVD PLAYBACK SETTING
CHANNEL SETTING
PROGRESSIVE OUT SET
PIC QUALITY CONTROL
PASSWORD SETTING
4
5
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Press ' / " to select “PARENTAL CNTRL LEVEL”, then press
SET/ENTER.
1 In the very first time, the screen
message asks, “SET THE
PASSWORD?” To set the
“PARENTAL CNTRL LEVEL”,
press \ / | to select “YES”,
then press SET/ENTER.
2 Press Number buttons to
input 4 digit password.
3 Press Number buttons to
input password again for
confirmation.
4 Press SET/ENTER at the “OK”
screen. Remember to write
down your password.
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
6
Press \ / | to select the desired
parental control level, then press
SET/ENTER.
7
Press \ / | to select the country
code, then press SET/ENTER.
8
Press EXIT to exit from Parental
Control Setting screen.
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
DISPLAYS SETTINGS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK
ENTER
Password Setting
1 Select “PASSWORD SETTING” in
step 3, then press SET/ENTER.
2 Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
3 Press Number buttons to input 4
digit password.
4 Press Number buttons to input
password again for confirmation.
5 Press SET/ENTER at the “OK”
screen. Remember to write down
your password.
• To change password, follow the Steps 15 above. Enter the current password after
Step 1, as would be asked by the screen.
• To cancel password, do the Step 1 above,
enter current password, select “NO” in the
Step 2 above, then press SET/ENTER.
NOTE
If you forget your password
• If you forget your password, and you wish
to return the password to its initial state,
press ■STOP/LIVE 4 times in a row at the
Password Setting screen.
Disc Language Setting
• You can set subtitle language, audio
language and menu language.
1 Select “DISC LANGUAGE” in step
4, then press SET/ENTER.
2 Press \ / | to select subtitle
language, then press SET/ENTER.
3 Press \ / | to select audio language, then press SET/ENTER.
4 Press \ / | to select menu language, then press SET/ENTER.
Function Setting
ADJUSTMENT
CLOCK
• The clock will normally be set using the VPS/PDC information when your Recorder automatically
tunes in the broadcast channels. If for any reason the VPS/PDC signals are not present, your
Recorder will not be able to set the clock. The “CLOCK” function lets you set the clock
manually. For the “ADJUSTMENT” field, select “AUTO” if you want the recorder to adjust time
automatically.
TIME:XX:XX(24H)
DATE:Day/Month
YEAR:XX
ADJUST:
AUTO/OFF
AUTO INSTALLATION
• This lets you perform the “AUTO INSTALLATION” function again. For details about the “AUTO
INSTALLATION” procedure, see page 25.
CONNECTING TERMINAL
VIDEO/
AUDIO SETTING
TV MODE SETTING
• If you switch your TV (i.e. because you have bought a new one) and
the screen size of the connected TV changes, you will have to change
the “TV MODE SETTING” setting.
• You can set the screen aspect ratio of the connected TV, and adjust
video output.
• Select “TV MODE SETTING” from “VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING”.
WIDE 16:9:
Select this when connecting with a TV with a 16:9
screen aspect ratio.
NORMAL 4:3: Select this when connecting with a TV with a 4:3 screen
aspect ratio.
LETTER BOX: If you connect with a TV whose screen aspect
ratio is 4:3 and playback a DVD with 16:9 video,
the video will be played back with black bands at
the top and bottom, while maintaining the 16:9
ratio.
PAN SCAN: If you connect with a TV whose screen aspect
ratio is 4:3 and playback a DVD with 16:9 video,
the video will be played back with the left and
right sides of the image cut off to display in 4:3
screen aspect ratio.
(This function works if the disc is labeled for
4:3PS.)
WIDE 16:9
NORMAL 4:3
LETTER BOX
PAN SCAN
L1 OUT
• This sets the type of video signal output from L1 (TV) according to the
specification of connected TV.
NOTE
• To view an RGB output video, press the TV/DVD button on the remote
control and switch to DVD mode.
• When “RGB” is selected for “L1 OUT” setting, progressive output does
not work.
S-VIDEO
RGB
COMPOSITE
L2
• This sets the type of video signal input from L2 (DECODER/EXT).
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
S-VIDEO
RGB/COMPOSITE
Function Setting
ADJUSTMENT
• You can set this to enjoy LPCM, Dolby Digital sound, DTS or MPEG
sound when connecting with digital input compatible device using
Digital cable.
LPCM
DGTL AUDIO OUT SET
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING
• Select the appropriate option.
• Select “AUTO” usually.
• If your amplifier/decoder is NOT compatible with 96kHz LPCM, select
“48kHz”. 96kHz sound will be output in 48kHz.
• If your amplifier/decoder is compatible with 96kHz LPCM, select
“96kHz”. 96kHz sound will be output.
AUTO
96kHz
48kHz
NOTE
When playing disc with copyright protection
• If you select “AUTO”, the sound will be down sampled at 48kHz.
• If you select “96kHz”, no digital sound will be output (only analogue
sound will be output). Select “AUTO”, so that outputting 48 kHz digital
sound.
Dolby Digital
• Setting as “PCM” converts the Dolby Digital into PCM (2 channel).
When your amplifier/decoder is NOT compatible with Dolby Digital,
set to “PCM”.
• Setting as “BITSTREAM” outputs Dolby Digital signals. When your
amplifier/decoder is compatible with Dolby Digital, set to
“BITSTREAM”.
BITSTREAM
PCM
NOTE
When playing a DVD-RW disc recorded in VR mode
• If the audio source on a disc is Dolby Digital format, set “Dolby
Digital” to “PCM” so that you can switch to main audio (Lch), sub
audio (Rch) or a mix of both (Lch+Rch) with your amplifier/decoder.
dts
• Setting as “BITSTREAM” outputs DTS signals. When your amplifier/
decoder is compatible with DTS, set to “BITSTREAM”.
• Setting as “OFF” outputs NO DTS signals. When your amplifier/
decoder is NOT compatible with DTS, set to “OFF”.
BITSTREAM
OFF
MPEG
• To play back multi-channel audio with an amplifier with decoder,
select “BITSTREAM”.
• To play back 2 channel audio with an amplifier without decoder,
select “PCM”.
BITSTREAM
PCM
DVD AUDIO OUT LEVEL
• This lets you adjust the range between the loudest and softest sound
(dynamic range), and play back at the average volume. Use this
when it is hard to hear dialogue.
NO:
This outputs recorded audio as is.
YES*:
This raises the average volume when playing back
Dolby Digital audio so that the volume sounds the same
as an audio CD. (If the audio sounds abnormal, set to
“NO”.)
* Lower the volume before setting. If you do not do so, the speaker
may emit a loud sound, or excessive input may be applied to the
speaker.
• This lets you operate the connected digital camcorder from the
Recorder when capturing video into the Recorder via a DV connection. You can also select the type of audio to be captured from the
camcorder.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
NO
YES
Function Setting
ADJUSTMENT
DV SETTING DV LINK SETTING
(DV-HR480F/DVHR450F only)
NO:
Select this when you cannot operate the camcorder properly with the
On-screen Control Panel.
YES:
This lets you operate the camcorder using the On-screen Control
Panel.
NO
YES
DV IN AUDIO SETTING
STEREO 1*:
This lets you capture audio you recorded with the camcorder.
STEREO 2*:
This lets you capture camcorder’s audio you recorded using after
recording.
STEREO 1 + 2*:
This lets you simultaneously capture audio from “STEREO 1” and
audio from “STEREO 2”.
* When the connected digital camcorder’s audio output is set to 16 bit,
this setting will be invalid.
STEREO 1
STEREO 2
STEREO 1 + 2
NOTE
• In the case of bilingual broadcast, you cannot select “Lch” or “Rch”.
DV CHAPTER SETTING
• This lets you select how the titles copied to the Recorder through DV
LINK are divided into chapters.
Selecting this lets you specify position to add a chapter, for DV input
recording.
ADD A CHAPTER AT THE TURN OF A NEW RECORDING
Selecting this automatically adds a chapter at the turn of a recording.
ADD A CHAPTER AT THE TURN OF A RECORDING DATE
Selecting this automatically adds a chapter at the turn of a recording
date.
ADJUST TO THE AUTO CHAPTER
Selecting this adds chapters at the interval set in the “AUTO CHAPTER
SETTING” (page 104).
NOT ADD A CHAPTER
This lets you copy titles with no chapter recorded.
BLUE
SCREEN
SETTING
ADD A CHAPTER AT
THE TURN OF A
NEW RECORDING
ADD A CHAPTER AT
THE TURN OF A
RECORDING DATE
ADJUST TO THE
AUTO CHAPTER
NOT ADD A
CHAPTER
BLUE SCREEN SETTING
• This lets you set so that noise on the TV screen is automatically
switched to a blue screen if you select a channel whose broadcast is
finished, or a channel with no broadcast.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
BLUE SCREEN OFF
BLUE SCREEN ON
Function Setting
Basic Operation for
ADJUSTMENT Setting
Example: Setting “VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING”
under “ADJUSTMENT”
1
1 Press START MENU to
display “START MENU” screen.
2 Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(“OTHER SETTINGS”), then
press SET/ENTER.
START MENU [OTHER SETTINGS]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
DISPLAYS SETTINGS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK
SELECT
2
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
Press \ / | to select “ADJUSTMENT”.
OTHER SETTINGS [ADJUSTMENT]
REC FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SET
ADJUSTMENT
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
CONTROL SET
CLOCK SETTING
AUTO INSTALLATION
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING
DV SETTING
BLUE SCREEN SETTING
SELECT
3
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
Press ' / " to select the setting
you want to set, then press SET/
ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS [ADJUSTMENT: VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING] 24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
REC FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SET
ADJUSTMENT
CONTROL SET
CLOCK SETTING
AUTO INSTALLATION
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING
DV SETTING
BLUE SCREEN SETTING
SELECT
4
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
1 Press ' / " to select the item
you want to select, then press
SET/ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS [ADJUSTMENT: VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING] 24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
TV MODE SETTING
CONNECTING TERMINAL
DGTL AUDIO OUT SET
DVD AUDIO OUT LEVEL
SELECT
WHICH IS YOUR CONNECTED TV MODE? SELECT IT.
ENTER
ENTER
16 : 9
4:3
WIDE 16 : 9
NORMAL 4 : 3
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
2 Press \ / | to select the desired option, then press SET/
ENTER.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
5
Press EXIT to exit.
Function Setting
CONTROL SET
AUTO POWER OFF SET
• This sets the Recorder so that power is automatically shut off if it is in stopped state for about 3
hours.
YES
NO
LCD BACKLIGHT SET
• This sets whether to turn the LCD backlight on or off during timer recording.
NO:
This sets so that the LCD backlight remains lit, even during timer recording.
YES:
This lets you turn off the LCD backlight only when the power is off (standby state) and timer
recording starts. It is convenient to set this, for example, when the light disturbs your sleep.
NO
YES
SYSTEM RESET
•
•
•
•
This resets all the settings of this Recorder.
All the settings except the password are set back to the factory default.
Data of Timer Recording and GUIDE Plus+ are erased.
Recorded titles on HDD are not erased.
Important!
• You cannot undo this operation.
NOTE
• If you cannot get a proper screen image on TV after “SYSTEM RESET” is done, confirm the “L1
OUT” setting of the Recorder and input setting of your TV. For details, see page 111 or the
operation manual of your TV.
VERSION
• This displays version information of the Recorder.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
RESET
NOT RESET
Function Setting
Basic Operation for
CONTROL SET
Example: Setting “LCD BACKLIGHT SET”
under “CONTROL SET”
1
1 Press START MENU to
display “START MENU” screen.
2 Press ' / " / \ / | to select
(“OTHER SETTINGS”), then
press SET/ENTER.
START MENU [OTHER SETTINGS]
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
DISPLAYS SETTINGS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK
SELECT
2
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
Press \ / | to select “CONTROL
SET”.
OTHER SETTINGS [ADJUST]
REC FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SET
ADJUSTMENT
24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
CONTROL SET
AUTO POWER OFF SET
LCD BACKLIGHT SET
SYSTEM RESET
VERSION
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
3
Press ' / " to select “LCD
BACKLIGHT SET”, then press
SET/ENTER.
4
Press\ / | to select “NO” or
“YES”, then press SET/ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS [CONTROL SET:LCD BACKLIGHT SET] 24 / 12 [SAT] 10 : 28
LEAVE THE BACKLIGHT OFF AS
THE POWER TURNS ON WHEN
THE TIMER RECORDING STARTS?
NO
SELECT
5
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
ENTER
ENTER
YES
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
Press EXIT to exit to normal
screen.
Troubleshooting
The following problems do not always suggest a defect or malfunction of this Recorder.
Perform the checks listed below before calling for service.
Problem
Suggested Solution
The Recorder power cannot be turned on.
• Is the power cord firmly plugged into the AC outlet?
• When the power cord is plugged into a power outlet, press RESET, and once the STANDBY indicator is lit,
turn on the power. (page 120)
• Press OPERATE after the STANDBY indicator turns on.
The Recorder makes operating sound, even when power is
turned off.
• This is the sound the Recorder makes during operation like timer recording and the TV listings reception.
The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray.
•
•
•
•
Make sure that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
Take out the disc and clean it.
Make sure that region number on the disc matches that of this Recorder.
Make sure that the disc is playable.
No picture.
•
•
•
•
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly.
Make sure that the connected TV or the AV amplifier is set to the correct input.
Take out the disc and clean it.
Make sure that region number on the disc matches that of this Recorder.
The Recorder cannot play a disc.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Settings have disappeared.
• If, while its power is on, the Recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) for more than about 1 hour, the
settings will be lost. Make sure that you turn off the Recorder before unplugging the power cord.
• With the power on, when there is a power interruption or the power cord is unplugged from the power outlet
and power is cut off, the TV listings data or the programming information may be cleared, and all settings
returned to the factory preset values. Also, the data for the content of a programme that was being recorded
may be deleted.
The power goes off.
• Is the “AUTO POWER OFF SET” set to “YES”? When the “AUTO POWER OFF SET” is set to “YES”, the power
will automatically be shut down after three continuous hours of inactivity (broadcast viewing state).
Screen freezes and operation buttons do not work.
•
•
•
•
Press ■STOP/LIVE and restart playback.
Turn off the power and turn on the power again.
If power does not go off, press the RESET button inside the front door of the Recorder.(Page 120)
Is the disc damaged or dirty? Check the condition of the disc. See page 17 for details about disc cleaning.
The remote control does not work.
•
•
•
•
Is the Tamper Proof function active?(Page 39)
Set the remote control and the Recorder to the same remote control code.(Page 22)
Use the remote control within its operating range.
Replace the batteries.
No sound, or sound is distorted.
• If the volume of TV or amplifier is set to minimum, turn the volume up.
• There is no sound during still mode, slow motion playback, fast forward and fast reverse.
• DVD audio recorded in DTS is only output from the DIGITAL AUDIO Output terminals. Connect a DTScompatible digital amplifier or decoder to the DIGITAL AUDIO Output OPTICAL* or COAXIAL terminal on this
Recorder. (* DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only)
• Check that the audio cable is connected correctly.
• Check that the cable plugs are clean.
• Take out the disc and clean it.
• Audio may not be output depending on the audio recording status, such as when audio other than an audio
signal or non-standard audio is recorded for the audio content of the disc.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Take out the disc and clean it.
Make sure that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
Make sure that region number on the disc matches that of this Recorder.
Remove the dew in the Recorder.
Check that the disc is recorded in PAL format.
The Recorder cannot playback video which was not recorded normally.
Proper playback may be impossible due to the state of the disc recording, a scratched, warped or dirty disc, the
state of the pick-up, or compatibility issues between this Recorder and the disc being used.
• When the amount of recorded time is short, playback may not be possible.
Continued on Next Page |||
Troubleshooting
Problem
Suggested Solution
The picture from external input is distorted.
• If the signal is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this Recorder. Connect the external equipment directly
to your TV.
The screen is stretched vertically or
horizontally.
• Set the TV mode according to the TV you are connecting.(Page 111)
• If the above operation does not set the TV mode, set it using the functions of the connected TV.
• When the “TV MODE SETTING” is set to “WIDE 16:9”, and 16:9 aspect video is recorded by this Recorder
onto the HDD with high-speed dubbing priority or onto a video format DVD, titles recorded in LP mode or a
lower recording mode will not be able to be displayed using the letter box or pan scan functions.
A disc recorded using this Recorder cannot be played back
on another DVD player.
• Check that the disc is finalised when the disc is in video mode.
• Some players will not play even a finalised disc.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, it can only be played back with an RW compatible player. (In some
cases, the disc must be finalised.)
• Use a CPRM compatible DVD player to play back a “Copy Once” title.
The playback screen will be disturbed if DVD video is recorded • This Recorder is compatible with the copy guard of analogue copy protect system. Some discs contain a
to a VCR, or played back through a VCR.
copy prohibiting signal. If you try to playback such a disc through a VCR, or record to a VCR and playback,
copy guard will prevent normal playback.
TV operates incorrectly.
• Some TVs with wireless remote control capability may operate incorrectly when using the remote control of
this Recorder. Use such TV away from this Recorder.
Recording stops.
• Recording may stop temporarily at parts where recording is impossible (due to scratches or disc fouling,
etc.). When recording starts again, the starting part will be recorded as another title. If the disc is in a
condition where recording is impossible, it is ejected.
• When the recording is interrupted, you might lose a few minutes of the recorded content immediately before
the interrupted point.
You operated to record, but nothing was recorded on disc.
• If you record a channel with no broadcast (i.e. where the broadcast has ended), recording will be done with
no video. Likewise, if you record a channel with poor reception, recording may be done with no video.
• Clean the disc.
Cannot record, or recording stops while in progress.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
When a digital camcorder is connected to the DV IN terminal,
video from the camcorder does not appear, or there is no
sound, or the system operates incorrectly. (DV-HR480F/DVHR450F only)
•
•
•
•
•
Check whether there is enough empty space on the disc to record to.
Check whether the disc is protected.
Check whether the number of original titles is 199 (for the HDD) or 99 (for a DVD-RW/R).
When a disc that has been edited on another DVD recorder has chapter markers greater than “999”, the disc
cannot be edited (recorded onto) by this Recorder.
A disc that has had scenes added or deleted from a single title more than 51 times may be unable to be
edited (recorded onto) by this Recorder.
Check whether you are trying to record video whose recording is prohibited.
Check whether there was a power failure while waiting for (or during) timer recording.
Clean the disc.
Proper playback may be impossible due to a scratched, warped or dirty disc, the state of the pick-up, or
compatibility issues between this Recorder and the disc being used.
Check connections.
Turn off the power of both the Recorder and camcorder once, and then turn it on again.
Reconnect DV cable.
Try setting “DV LINK SETTING” to “NO” using “DV SETTING” screen.(Page 113)
Switch input audio using “DV IN AUDIO SETTING” screen.(Page 113)
Cannot operate the digital camcorder connected to the DV IN • Set “DV LINK SETTING” to “YES” using “DV SETTING” screen. You can operate using the On-screen Control
terminal. (DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only)
Panel.
• Operation may be impossible, depending on the connected camcorder.
There is no video and no audio.
• Does the broadcast have no video or audio?
• Has the Recorder been switched to external input?
• Are all connections to external devices correct? (page 100)
There is just audio with no video.
• Is the connection cable for video output connected properly?
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Continued on Next Page |||
Troubleshooting
Problem
Suggested Solution
Horizontally wide video appears vertically tall, or black bands
appear at the top and bottom of the screen.
• Is “TV MODE SETTING” set to match the connected TV? (Page 111)
• If you are using a wide TV, is the “TV MODE SETTING” set to “WIDE 16:9”? (Page 111)
• When the “TV MODE SETTING” is set to “WIDE 16:9”, and recorded by this Recorder onto the HDD with highspeed dubbing priority or onto a video format DVD, titles recorded in LP mode or a lower recording mode will
not be able to be displayed using the letter box or pan scan functions.
Square noise (mosaic) appears on the screen.
• Pictures in blocks may be conspicuous in scenes with rapid movement due to the characteristics of digital
image compression technology.
Video stops.
• Has the Recorder been subjected to shock or impact? Are you using it at an unstable location? The Recorder
will stop if it senses shock or vibration.
• The picture may be disturbed in very rare cases due to the characteristics of the HDD. This is not a
malfunction.
Left and right channels of audio are reversed, or sound comes • Are left and right audio cables connected to the opposite terminal, or is one side disconnected?
out of only one side.
DVD disc does not play back automatically.
• Has HDD been selected instead of DVD? Playback will start automatically by switching to DVD.
• Have you set a DVD video disc that has an automatic playback function?
Timer recording was set, but not executed.
•
•
•
•
The timer recorded content stops in the middle of recording.
•
•
•
•
•
Timer recording was set, but a different programme was
recorded.
• Even if the broadcast is displayed correctly, there are cases in which the content of the broadcast changes
due to circumstances at the broadcast station.
The REC LIST (THUMBNAIL or TITLE LIST) is not displayed.
• The REC LIST cannot be displayed during playback of the Time Shift Viewing or Chasing Playback. Press the
■STOP/LIVE button, and return to live viewing.
• If you use the Recorder at a location with low temperature, the HDD may enter the preparation state. Please
wait a while.
• There may be a problem with the HDD. Contact the nearest service centre approved by Sharp.
Was there a power failure while standing by for timer recording?
Is the HDD or DVD full? Erase unnecessary titles from the list.
Were you performing dubbing?
If you use the Recorder at a location with low temperature, the HDD may enter the preparation state. Set and
leave power “ON” for a while before timer recording is performed.
• Is the power cord unplugged from the AC outlet?
Was the power plug unplugged, or was there a power failure, during timer recording?
Is the HDD or DVD full? Erase unnecessary titles from the list.
Recording will stop if a programme whose recording is forbidden begins in the middle of recording.
Clean the disc.
If there is a power failure or other power problem during recording to DVD-RW/R, recording will stop in the
middle. If there is a power failure or other power problem during recording to HDD, that program will be lost.
When a CD is recorded to MD using digital connection, the CD • If Dolby Virtual Surround is set to “ON”, song numbers will not be assigned to the MD. When recording a CD
onto an MD, set the Dolby Virtual Surround to “OFF”.
and MD do not have the same track numbers.
• If the interval between CD tracks is short, the track numbers on the recorded MD may differ from those of the
CD.
The Recorder makes a sound even when there is no operation. • If you do not operate the Recorder for a certain time while power is ON, you will hear the sound of the HDD
operating. This is not a malfunction.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Continued on Next Page |||
Troubleshooting
Problem
Suggested Solution
The Recorder heats up during use.
• When using this Recorder, the console cabinet may heat up, depending on the use environment. This is not a
malfunction.
The Recorder makes a snapping sound when starting
recording, playback or loading a disc.
• The Recorder may sometimes make a snapping sound when starting recording or playback if you have not
operated it for a while or when loading a disc. This is the sound of the Recorder operating, and is not a
malfunction.
Cannot operate the Recorder.
• Are you operating the Recorder within the specified operating temperature range? (Page 8) When using this
Recorder in an extremely cold environment, the hard disc requires time to warm up so it can be operated
without being damaged. It takes a few moments for the HDD to warm up for use after power is supplied.
Cannot display TV listings.
Cannot set timer recording with GUIDE Plus+ system.
•
•
•
•
The operating noise level increases during High Speed
Dubbing.
• This is natural as the dubbing speed increases during High Speed Dubbing. It is not due to a malfunction.
Cannot control external receiver from the Recorder.
• Has the G-LINK cable been connected correctly? Is the infrared sender pointing towards the infrared receptor
of external receiver? (Pages 23 and 46)
• Was your setting for your external receiver correct? (Pages 46 and 57)
• Wait overnight and try external receiver setup again. (Page 46)
The Recorder cannot change a channel in the external
receiver's preset to one with a 3-digit programme number.
• Access the “Setup” Area, select “External Receiver” and repeat the setup for your brand to select a new code
that may accommodate three digits.
Did you complete “Auto Installation” correctly? (Page 25)
Did you enter the channel settings by the area number? (Pages 46, 47)
Is the Host Channel set correctly? (Pages 47)
Did you turn the power off 10 seconds or more before the TV listings data reception time? Even if you are
receiving the Host Channel at the time of TV listings data reception, the TV listings data can be downloaded;
however, when an operation such as displaying a channel, displaying an image, or displaying the Start Menu
screen is performed, the download of TV listings data is cancelled.
• Did you reset the channel settings? Did you change the host station with the GUIDE Plus+ settings? If these
settings are changed, the broadcast display data will be cleared.
• Has the clock been set? (Page 29)
Timer Recording was set with the One-Button-Record feature, • If the channel to be recorded is received via the external receiver, make sure that the external receiver was
left switched to the ON position.
but a wrong channel was recorded.
• Make sure that the channel to be recorded is correctly set in the “Editor” Area.
NOTE
• If this Recorder receives strong interference from strong external noise such as excessive static electricity, malfunction of
power supply voltage caused by lightning during Recorder use or a wrong operation is sent to the Recorder, errors like the
Recorder not accepting an operation may occur. Press RESET with a toothpick or other narrow rod-like object (nonmetal)
when the Recorder does not operate properly even after the power has been turned off and then back on again.
• When RESET is pressed while the power is on, the Recorder will once be turned off. Turn the power on again. At this
juncture, it may take a few moments for the system processing to finish
before the system is ready for use. During system processing, the HDD and
DVD Mode indicators on the front panel display of the Recorder will blink,
and once system processing has finished, it will be lit. You can operate the
Recorder when the HDD and DVD Mode indicators are lit.
RESET button
• Since the clock, channel, timer recording programmes and other data in
memory are also reset when RESET has been pressed, they must be set
again.
• When the problem persists even after pressing RESET, unplug the power cord and plug it again. If this does not solve the
problem, contact the nearest service centre approved by Sharp.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
On-screen Error Messages
Messages Relating to DVD and HDD
• The following messages appear on the TV screen in case the disc you tried to playback is not appropriate or
the operation is not correct.
Error message
CANNOT PLAY THIS DISC.
INCOMPATIBLE DISC.
CANNOT OPERATE.
DISC IS PROTECTED.
COULD NOT REPAIR THE DISC.
COULD NOT FINALISE.
RECORDING PROHIBITED.
CANNOT RECORD.
TITLE (CHAPTER) IS FULL.
CANNOT RECORD ANY MORE.
CANNOT RECORD ON THIS DISC.
NO CASSETTE IN CAMCORDER.
(DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only)
COULD NOT INITIALISE.
DISC IS FULL.
CANNOT RECORD.
CANNOT RECORD THIS PROGRAM ON
THIS DISC.
CANNOT DETECT CAMCORDER.
(DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only)
SET THE DATE AND TIME.
HDD IS FULL, STOPPED RECORDING.
REPAIRING THE DISC.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Possible Error
• The disc cannot be played back with
this Recorder.
• If you load a disc which cannot be
played with this Recorder (i.e. a
scratched disc), or if you load a disc
upside down, this message will
appear, and the disc tray will
automatically pop out.
• Occurs if operation is incorrect.
• Occurs if you attempt to record or edit
a disc for which disc protection is set.
• If there is a power failure during DVD
recording, the system automatically
tries to recover data after power is
restored. This error occurs if such
recovery is impossible as the disc is
scratched or dirty.
• Occurs if the disc is scratched or
dirty, etc.
• Occurs if video with a copy guard
signal is input.
• Occurs if a title or chapter marker
exceeds the recordable upper limit.
• Number of titles: HDD 199/DVD 99.
Number of chapters: HDD 999/
DVD 999
• Occurs if you load a disc which cannot
be recorded to with this Recorder, or a
disc which is scratched or dirty.
• Occurs if you attempt operation when a
tape has not been loaded in the digital
camcorder linked via DV connection.
• Occurs if the disc is scratched or
dirty, etc.
• Occurs if there is no empty space in
the disc.
• Occurs if you try to record a “Copy
Once” broadcast onto a disc which is
not compatible with CPRM.
• Occurs if you set to DV input without
connecting a digital camcorder.
• Occurs if multiple digital camcorders
are connected.
• Occurs if timer programming is done
when the Recorder clock has not been
set.
• Occurs when empty space in the
disc runs out.
• Occurs when recording stops
before disc information has been
correctly written onto a DVD, due to
a problem like a power failure.
Suggested Solution
• Check the disc, and load it correctly.
• Cancel disc protection, or reload a
recordable disc.
• Check the disc, and load it correctly.
• Cannot record.
• Erase unnecessary titles.
• Either erase unnecessary chapters, or
combine chapters.
• Reload an appropriate recording
disc.
• Load a tape into the digital
camcorder.
• Check the disc, and load it correctly.
• Load a disc with empty space.
• Erase unnecessary titles.
• Load a CPRM compatible disc (DVDRW Ver. 1.1 or higher) initialised in VR
mode.
• Connect a digital camcorder, and
reset again to DV input.
• Set the clock and perform timer
programming again.
• Wait until DVD disc recovery is
finished.
On-screen Error Messages
Error message
INCOMPATIBLE DISC.
CANNOT RECORD THIS PROGRAM
ON THIS DISC.
TIMER PROGRAM COULD NOT
START.
RECORDING PROHIBITED.
STOPPED RECORDING AND
RETURNED TO LIVE BROADCAST.
RECORDING PROHIBITED, CANNOT
RECORD.
ERROR IN HDD. CANNOT OPERATE.
CAN ONLY VIEW LIVE BROADCASTS.
CONTACT THE NEAREST SERVICE
CENTRE APPROVED BY SHARP.
SYSTEM ERROR.
TURNING THE POWER OFF.
RECORDING PROHIBITED.
CANNOT VIEW TIME SHIFT.
Possible Error
• Occurs if the loaded disc cannot be
recorded to or played because it is
a non-standard or scratched, etc.
• Occurs if you try to record “Copy
Once” video onto DVD-R or nonCPRM compatible DVD-RW.
• Occurs if a programme begins
during recording, and recording of
the broadcast itself is forbidden due
to copyright protection.
• Occurs if you attempt to record a
programme, and recording of the
broadcast itself is forbidden due to
copyright protection.
• Occurs when there is a problem
with the HDD, and when you
perform an operation which
requires HDD operation, like special
playback or recording.
• If a problem occurs with the HDD
while power is “ON”, power is shut
off automatically.
• Occurs if time shift viewing is
impossible because recording of
the broadcast itself is forbidden by
copyright protection.
Suggested Solution
• Remove the disc.
• Record on CPRM compatible DVDRW disc in VR mode.
• Initialise the HDD once. If
initialisation does not solve the
problem, please contact the nearest
service centre approved by Sharp
as soon as possible.
• You can only view live broadcasts.
Messages during Special Playback
Error message
Possible Error
HDD CONDITION HAS DETERIORATED. CANNOT OPERATE.
• Occurs if you perform operation like
special playback when there is
problem with the HDD.
PREPARING HDD. CANNOT OPERATE.
• Occurs if you perform operation
requiring operation of the HDD (like
special playback or recording)
during HDD preparation.
Suggested Solution
• The HDD must be repaired, so
contact the nearest service centre
approved by Sharp as soon as
possible.
• You can only view live broadcasts
until preparation is finished. Wait a
while until operation is enabled. (If
you use the Recorder at a cold
location and the HDD temperature
is low, HDD preparation may take
some time.)
Messages during Dubbing
Error message
CANNOT MAKE ANY MORE SELECTIONS.
CANNOT HIGH SPEED DUB THIS
TITLE.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Possible Error
Suggested Solution
• Occurs if you attempt to select 11
titles (chapters) at the screen for
selecting titles or chapters to be
dubbed.
• Occurs if you attempt high-speed
dubbing onto DVD in Video mode of
a title for which High Speed
Dubbing Priority has not been set,
or if you attempt high speed
dubbing of a title edited in frame
units on the HDD.
• Dub 10 titles (or chapters) at a time.
• Perform “Rate Conversion Dubbing”.
Continued on Next Page |||
On-screen Error Messages
Error message
Possible Error
Suggested Solution
TITLE PROTECTION IS SET.
CANCEL TITLE PROTECTION
BEFORE DUBBING.
• Occurs when you attempt to dub a
title containing a “Copy Once” part
for which title protection has been
set.
PROGRAM IS COPY PROTECTED.
CANNOT DUB TO THIS DISC.
• Occurs if you attempt to dub a title
containing a “Copy Once” part to
DVD-R or a non-CPRM compatible
DVD-RW.
• Occurs if an unrecordable disc is
loaded (i.e. when the maximum
number of titles or chapters is
exceeded, when the disc is
protected, when the disc is
scratched or dirty, or when the disc
is a ROM disc).
• Occurs when a disc other than a
DVD-RW/R is loaded.
• If a title contains a “Copy Once”
part, you can only move the
original. If title protection is set for a
title, you cannot move it, so perform
dubbing (movement) after cancelling title protection.
• Dub in VR mode to a CPRMcompatible DVD-RW.
CANNOT DUB TO THIS DISC.
CANNOT DUB FROM THIS DISC.
• Replace with a recordable disc
(Page 10).
• Dub from a DVD-RW/R disc.
Messages during Editing
Error message
CANNOT MAKE ANY MORE SELECTIONS.
CANNOT SPECIFY THIS POSITION.
CHAPTER IS FULL. CANNOT
OPERATE.
CANNOT COMBINE THESE CHAPTERS.
Possible Error
• Occurs if you attempt to select
more than 20 titles (chapters) when
you perform Erase Selected Title.
• Occurs if you attempt to designate
a range shorter than 3 seconds and
edit.
• Occurs if the editing result exceeds
the upper limit of total number of
chapters (999).
• Occurs if you attempt to combine
chapters which cannot be combined. (Chapters created when you
erase a scene or chapter in a single
title cannot be erased).
Suggested Solution
• Erase a maximum of 20 titles
(chapters) at a time.
• Designate a range of 3 seconds or
more. (If you designate a range of 3
seconds or more, you can
designate in frame units.)
• Edit after erasing unnecessary
chapter markers by combining
chapters.
Other Message
Error message
THE GUIDE Plus+ SYSTEM IS NOT
AVAILABLE DURING PLAYBACK,
EDIT, ETC.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Possible Error
• Occurs if you press GUIDE to call
up the GUIDE Plus+ system during
playback, edit, etc.
Suggested Solution
• Quit playback, edit etc. and try
again.
Glossary
Alternative
Recording
If you set to Exact Recording but the timer recording programme will not fit into a single
DVD-RW/R, the Recorder will automatically perform Alternative Recording to HDD.
The Recorder will also perform Alternative Recording to HDD if you forget to load a
DVD-RW/R.
Angle
Recorded onto some DVD discs are scenes which have been simultaneously shot from
a number of different angles (the same scene is shot from the front, from the left side,
from the right side, etc.). With such discs, you can select the angle on Function Control
Screen to view the scene from different angles.
Chapter
Number
These numbers are recorded on DVD discs. A title is subdivided into many sections,
each of which is numbered, and specific parts of video presentations can be searched
quickly using these numbers.
Chasing Playback
This function lets you playback and view a programme while it is being recorded onto
HDD.
Copy Guard
This function prevents copying. You cannot record software or broadcast programmes
marked by the copyright holder with a signal which limits copying.
Digital Super
Picture
Enhances the fine detail of the image and outlines of the objects it contains.
Disc Menu
This lets you select things like the subtitle language or overdub audio using a menu
stored on the DVD video disc.
Dolby Digital
A sound system developed by Dolby Laboratories Inc. that gives movie theatre ambience to audio output when the product is connected to a Dolby Digital processor or
amplifier.
Dolby Digital
Output Level
Setting that increases the average volume of Dolby Digital audio when playing a DVD.
Dolby Virtual
Surround
This lets you enjoy Surround audio via analogue connection with a stereo (2ch) TV or
audio equipment.
DTS
This is a digital sound system developed by Digital Theater Systems for use in cinemas.
This system uses 6 audio channels and provides accurate sound field positioning and
realistic acoustics. (By connecting a DTS Digital Surround decoder, you can also listen
to DTS Digital Surround sound.)
Exact Dubbing
This function is used when dubbing from HDD to DVD. It automatically selects the
recording mode according to the recording time of the title so that the recording will fit
into a single disc.
Exact Recording
This function automatically changes the recording mode to prevent recordings from
running out before they are finished due to a lack of available DVD disc space by
comparing the available disc space and the time required for the timer recording.
Finalisation
This is done to enable playback of discs (Video mode) recorded with this Recorder
using other DVD-RW and DVD-R compatible DVD players. (We do not guarantee that
playback will be possible with all DVD players.)
The DVD players which can play back VR mode discs are those with an “ ” indication.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Continued on Next Page |||
Glossary
G-LINK jack
This is a jack in the back of the Recorder to connect Infrared transmitter through G-LINK
cable so that you can control your external receiver from the Recorder.
GUIDE Plus+
An interactive on-screen television programming guide. You can set timer recording
easily with one-touch from an electronic programme listing table.
High Speed
Dubbing Priority
This function lets you perform high speed dubbing to a DVD even in Video mode after
recording, by setting “HI SP DUB SETTING” to “YES” when recording to HDD.
HOST CHANNEL
This is a channel from which you can download the GUIDE Plus+ TV listing data. You
should tune in to the Host Channel in your country.
Initialisation
This allows you to use the HDD or a DVD-RW disc in this Recorder. If you initialise a
disc, all of the programmes recorded on it are erased.
Letter Box
Screen size that cuts off the top and bottom of the image to allow playing of widescreen (16:9) software on a connected 4:3 TV.
4:3
LB
Linear PCM
Sound
Linear PCM is a signal recording format used for Audio CDs.
The sound on Audio CDs is recorded at 44.1 kHz with 16 bits. (On DVD discs, sound is
recorded at between 48 kHz with 16 bits and 96 kHz with 24 bits.)
MP3
One type of audio compression that uses MPEG1. This format compresses sound to
about 1/10, without impairing the original sound quality.
Multi Angle
This is a feature of DVD video discs. In some discs, the same picture is shot from
different angles, and these are stored in a single disc so you can enjoy playback from
different angles. (This function can be enjoyed if the disc is recorded with multiple
angles.)
Multi Audio
This is a feature of DVD video discs. This function makes it possible to record multiple
different audio tracks for the same video, so you can enhance your enjoyment by switching audio. (You can enjoy this function with discs recorded with multiple audio tracks.)
My TV
This is a feature of the GUIDE Plus+ system. You can define your personal profile
according to which the system automatically scan the TV listings data to make recommendations to you.
Original
A video (title) recorded from a TV broadcast or external input is called an “Original”.
Pan Scan
Screen size that cuts off the sides of the image to allow playing of wide-screen (16:9)
software on a connected 4:3 TV.
4:3
PS
Parental Control
In some digital broadcasts and DVD video discs, a control level for disc viewing is set
depending on the age of the viewer. With this Recorder, you can set the control level for
viewing such broadcasts and discs.
Play List
A set of titles created by copying just the needed scenes from original titles is called a
“Play List”. (The original titles remain as they are.)
Playback
Control (PBC)
This information is recorded on video CDs (version 2.0). This allows you to actively
select the sections to be viewed or listened to, using a menu displayed on the TV.
Rate Conversion Dubbing
This function is used to select the picture quality of dubbed titles at the time of dubbing.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Continued on Next Page |||
Glossary
REC LIST
This is a list screen which lets you check the recorded programmes (titles) in list form.
You can select either Thumbnail or Title List as the REC LIST.
Region
Number
Number identifying a geographic region of compatibility for a DVD.
Remote Control Code
This is the type of the remote control signal for operating the recorder. There are two
types of remote control signal: “Remote Control No. 1” (RC-1) and “Remote Control No.
2” (RC-2).
Resume Playback
If you stop playback while it is in progress, the Recorder stores the stop position in
memory, and this function lets you playback from that stopping point.
Simultaneous
Recording/
Playback
This function lets you play back and view already recorded programmes while you are
recording. (However, you cannot play back from a DVD while recording to the DVD.)
Skip
This returns to the start of the chapter (or track) being played, or skips to the next
chapter (or track).
Subtitles
These are the printed lines appearing at the bottom of the screen which translate or
transcribe the dialogue. They are recorded on DVD discs.
Time Number
This indicates the play time which has elapsed from the start of a disc or a title. It can
be used to find a specific scene quickly. (It may not work with some discs.)
Time Shift
This Recorder is designed so you can automatically record the programme being
viewed to the HDD by pressing the TIME SHIFT button. The automatically recorded
programme can be viewed using other types of playback.
Title Menu
In a DVD video disc, this is the menu for selecting things like the chapter to be played
back and the subtitle language. In some DVD video discs, the title menu may be called
the “Top Menu”.
Title Number
These numbers are recorded on DVD discs. When a disc contains two or more movies,
these movies are numbered as title 1, title 2, etc.
Track Number
These numbers are assigned to the tracks which are recorded on video CDs and Audio
CDs. They enable specific tracks to be located quickly.
VBR Control
VBR is the abbreviation for Variable Bit Rate control. This feature performs control by
varying the bit rate (the amount of code transferred in a fixed period of time) by assigning a larger amount of code to complex video images such as sections containing rapid
movement or sections containing sudden changes in colour, and assigning a smaller
amount of code in the opposite cases.
Video Mode
This is a recording format for making DVD-RW/R discs playable with other commercially
available DVD players. (We do not guarantee that playback will be possible with all DVD
players.)
VR Mode
This recording format is the basic DVD-RW recording format, and lets you enjoy the
various editing functions available with this Recorder.
WMA
Windows Media Audio. A format for encoding digital audio files. Compresses data at
higher rates than MP3.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Specifications
General
HDD capacity: ................................ 250 GB (DV-HR480F),
160 GB (DV-HR450F),
80 GB (DV-HR400F)
Power supply: ................................. AC 220-240 V, 50 Hz
Power consumption (Normal): ........ 36 W
Power consumption (Standby): ...... 1.5 W (When the Front Panel
Display is off)
Dimensions: .................................... Approx. 430 mm × 59 mm × 323
mm (W × H × D)
Weight: ............................................ Approx. 5.3 kg
Operating temperature ................... 5°C to 35°C
Storage temperature: ...................... –20°C to 55°C
Operating humidity: ........................ 10% to 80% (no condensation)
TV systems: ..................................... PAL system, 625 lines, 50 fields
Recording
Recordable disc media: ................. DVD-RW, DVD-R
Recording system (HDD): ............... Video: MPEG
Audio: Dolby Digital (2ch)/Linear
PCM (XP/MN32 mode only)
Recording system (DVD-RW/R): ....... Video: DVD-Video Recording
(VR mode)
DVD-VIDEO (Video mode)
Audio: Dolby Digital (2ch)/Linear
PCM (XP/MN32 mode only)
Recording time (Hard disc): ........... XP (High picture quality):
Approx. 61 hours (DV-HR480F)
Approx. 40 hours (DV-HR450F)
Approx. 20 hours (DV-HR400F)
SP (Standard):
Approx. 104 hours (DV-HR480F)
Approx. 68 hours (DV-HR450F)
Approx. 33 hours (DV-HR400F)
LP (2X):
Approx. 208 hours (DV-HR480F)
Approx. 137 hours (DV-HR450F)
Approx. 67 hours (DV-HR400F)
EP (3X):
Approx. 312 hours (DV-HR480F)
Approx. 205 hours (DV-HR450F)
Approx. 100 hours (DV-HR400F)
MN (Manual):
32 levels between XP and EP
(However, the maximum
continuous recording time is 12
hours.)
Recording time
(with 4.7GB DVD-RW/R): ............ XP (High picture quality):
Approx. 1 hour
SP (Standard): Approx. 2 hours
LP (2X): Approx. 4 hours
EP (3X): Approx. 6 hours
MN (Manual): 32 levels between
XP and EP
Playback
Playable discs: ................................ DVD Video, DVD-RW/R,
DVD+RW/R, DVD-RAM, Audio
CD (CD-DA), Video CD, CD-RW/
R (CD-DA, Video CD format,
MP3 file format, WMA file
format, JPEG file format)
Tuner
Channel coverage: ......................... PAL-B/G: VHF 2-12
UHF 21-69
CATV S1-S41
SECAM-L: VHF 2-12
UHF 21-69
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
CATV B-Q
Timer
Programmes: .................................. 16 programmes/1 month
Clock: .............................................. Quartz clock
(24-hour digital display)
Memory backup: ............................. Approx. 1 hour
Input/Output
VHF/UHF antenna input/
output terminal: ...........................
Video input: .....................................
Input level: ...............................
SCARTs: ...................................
Jack: ........................................
Video output:
Output level: ............................
SCARTs: ...................................
Jack: ........................................
S-Video input: .................................
Y-Input level: ............................
C-Input level: ...........................
SCARTs: ...................................
Jack: ........................................
S-Video output:
Y-Output level: .........................
C-Output level: ........................
SCART (only LINE 1): ..............
Jack: ........................................
Component video output:
Output level: ............................
75Ω (F-shape connector)
LINE 1, LINE 2 (rear), 3 (front)
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
21 pin
RCA-pin jack
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
21 pin
RCA-pin jack
LINE 2 (rear), 3 (front)
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
0.3 Vp-p (75Ω)
21 pin
4 pin mini DIN
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
0.3 Vp-p (75Ω)
21 pin
4 pin mini DIN
Y: 1 Vp-p (75Ω)
PB/CB, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)
Jacks: ...................................... RCA jack
Audio input: ..................................... Input 1, 2 (rear), 3 (front) L/R
Input level: ............................... 2 V rms (Input impedance: more
than 22 kΩ)
Jacks: ...................................... RCA jack
Audio output: .................................. L/R
Output level: ............................ 2 V rms (Output impedance:
less than 1.5 kΩ)
Jacks: ...................................... RCA jack
Digital audio optical output (DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only):
Terminal: .................................. Square Optical terminal
Digital audio coaxial output:
Jack: ........................................ RCA jack
DV input (DV-HR480F/DV-HR450F only):
Terminal: .................................. 4 pin (i.LINK/IEEE 1394
standard)
G-LINK:
Terminal: .................................. Mini jack
LASER Specification
Wave length: ................................... DVD: 658 nm
CD: 785 nm
Laser power: ................................... DVD: 160 mW(Pulse)
CD: 8.5 mW(Continuous)
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals
Downloaded From Disc-Player.com Sharp Manuals